AFG-303X Series User Manual

Arbitrary Function Generator

AFG-3021, 3022, 3031 & AFG-3032

USER MANUAL

GW INSTEK PART NO. 82FG-30320EC1

ISO-9001 CERTIFIED MANUFACTURER

August 2016 edition

This manual contains proprietary information, which is protected by copyright. All rights are reserved. No part of this manual may be photocopied, reproduced or translated to another language without prior written consent of Good Will Corporation.

The information in this manual was correct at the time of printing.

However, Good Will continues to improve its products and therefore reserves the right to change the specifications, equipment, and maintenance procedures at any time without notice.

Good Will Instrument Co., Ltd.

No. 7-1, Jhongsing Rd., Tucheng City, Taipei County 236, Taiwan.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents

S AFETY INSTRUCTIONS .................................. 6

G ETTING STARTED ....................................... 12

Main Features ................................................................... 12

Panel Overview .................................................................. 15

Setting up the Function Generator .................................... 24

Q UICK REFERENCE ....................................... 26

How to use the Digital Inputs ........................................... 28

How to use the Help Menu ............................................... 29

Selecting a Waveform ........................................................ 32

Modulation ........................................................................ 36

Sweep ................................................................................ 42

Burst ................................................................................. 43

ARB ................................................................................... 44

Utility Menu ...................................................................... 48

Menu Tree ......................................................................... 51

Default Settings ................................................................ 68

O PERATION .................................................. 70

Select a Channel ................................................................ 71

Select a Waveform ............................................................. 72

M ODULATION............................................... 90

Amplitude Modulation (AM) ............................................. 92

Frequency Modulation (FM) ............................................ 101

Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) Modulation ........................ 109

Phase Modulation (PM) .................................................. 116

SUM Modulation ............................................................. 122

Pulse Width Modulation .................................................. 129

Sweep .............................................................................. 136

3

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Burst Mode ..................................................................... 147

S ECONDARY SYSTEM FUNCTION SETTINGS

.................................................................... 159

Save, Recall or Delete ...................................................... 160

Selecting the Remote Interface ........................................ 164

System and Settings ........................................................ 169

D UAL CHANNEL & MULTI-UNIT OPERATION

.................................................................... 178

Dual Channel Settings ..................................................... 179

Multi-Unit Syncing .......................................................... 187

A RBITRARY WAVEFORMS ............................ 191

Inserting Built-In Waveforms ........................................... 192

Display an Arbitrary Waveform ........................................ 199

Editing an Arbitrary Waveform ......................................... 206

Output an Arbitrary Waveform ......................................... 215

Saving/Loading an Arbitrary Waveform ............................ 222

R EMOTE INTERFACE ................................... 230

Establishing a Remote Connection .................................. 231

Web Browser Control Interface ........................................ 238

Command Syntax ............................................................. 241

Command List ................................................................. 246

488.2 Common Commands.............................................. 252

Status Register Commands .............................................. 255

System Commands .......................................................... 261

Apply Commands ............................................................ 264

Output Commands .......................................................... 272

Pulse Configuration Commands ...................................... 282

Harmonic Commands ...................................................... 286

Amplitude Modulation (AM) Commands ......................... 289

AM Overview ................................................................... 289

4

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Frequency Modulation (FM) Commands ......................... 294

FM Overview ................................................................... 294

Frequency-Shift Keying (FSK) Commands ........................ 299

FSK Overview .................................................................. 299

Phase Modulation (PM) Commands ................................ 303

PM Overview ................................................................... 303

Additive Modulation (SUM) Commands .......................... 307

SUM Overview ................................................................. 307

Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Commands ................... 312

PWM Overview ................................................................ 312

Frequency Sweep Commands .......................................... 317

Sweep Overview .............................................................. 317

Burst Mode Commands ................................................... 328

Burst Mode Overview ...................................................... 328

Arbitrary Waveform Commands ....................................... 338

Arbitrary Waveform Overview .......................................... 338

Tracking Commands ........................................................ 379

Reference Commands ...................................................... 384

Save and Recall Commands ............................................. 385

Error Messages ............................................................... 387

SCPI Status Registers ...................................................... 400

A PPENDIX ................................................... 406

Fuse Replacement ........................................................... 406

AFG-3021, AFG-3022, AFG-3031 & AFG-3032 Specifications

........................................................................................ 407

Declaration of Conformity ............................................... 414

ARB Built-In Waveforms .................................................. 415

I NDEX ......................................................... 423

5

6

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

S

AFETY INSTRUCTIONS

This chapter contains important safety instructions that should be followed when operating and storing the function generator. Read the following before any operation to ensure your safety and to keep the function generator in the best condition.

Safety Symbols

These safety symbols may appear in this manual or on the instrument.

WARNING

Warning: Identifies conditions or practices that could result in injury or loss of life.

CAUTION

Caution: Identifies conditions or practices that could result in damage to the function generator or to other objects or property.

DANGER High Voltage

Attention: Refer to the Manual

Signal ground. Chassis ground

Signal ground. Isolated from other channels and ground.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Do not dispose electronic equipment as unsorted municipal waste. Please use a separate collection facility or contact the supplier from which this instrument was purchased.

Safety Guidelines

General

Guideline

CAUTION



















Do not place heavy objects on the instrument.

Do not place flammable objects on the instrument.

Avoid severe impact or rough handling that may damage the function generator.

Avoid discharges of static electricity on or near the function generator.

Use only mating connectors, not bare wires, for the terminals.

The instrument should only be disassembled by a qualified technician.

Do not apply more than 42Vpk to any input/output ground or to the chassis ground.

Do not apply voltage to the output terminals to avoid damage to the instrument.

Do not apply more than ±5V to the trigger or

MOD input terminals to avoid damage to the instrument.

(Measurement categories) EN 61010-1:2010 specifies the measurement categories and their requirements as follows. The

AFG-30XX falls under category II.

 Measurement category IV is for measurement performed at the source of a low-voltage installation.

 Measurement category III is for measurement performed in a building installation.

 Measurement category II is for measurement performed on circuits directly connected to a low voltage installation.

 Measurement category I is for measurements performed on circuits not directly connected to Mains.

7

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Power Supply

WARNING

Fuse

WARNING

Ground

CAUTION

WARNING





AC Input voltage: 100 - 240V AC, 50 - 60Hz.

Connect the protective grounding conductor of the AC power cord to an earth ground to prevent electric shock.











Fuse type:

AFG-3032&3022: T1A/250V

AFG-3031&3021: T0.63A/250V

Only qualified technicians should replace the fuse.

To ensure fire protection, replace the fuse only with the specified type and rating.

Disconnect the power cord and all test leads before replacing the fuse.

Make sure the cause of the fuse blowout is fixed before replacing the fuse.











The AFG-30XX is a floating function generator; the AFG-30XXs’ common ground is electrically isolated from the chassis ground by a 42Vpk isolation voltage (DC + peak AC). Exceeding

42Vpp may cause damage to the internal circuits.

Do not short the chassis ground with

CH1(MAIN)’s or CH2’s common ground if there is a potential voltage difference between them. Doing so may damage the unit or externally connected equipment.

If there is a potential voltage between CH1’s and

CH2’s common ground, do not short them.

Doing so may damage the unit or externally connected equipment.

To avoid electric shock ensure that the output voltage and floating voltage does not exceed

42Vpk in total.

Do not touch any exposed connectors when the unit is being operated.

8

Cleaning the function generator

Operation

Environment

Storage environment








Disconnect the power cord before cleaning the function generator.

Use a soft cloth dampened in a solution of mild detergent and water. Do not spray any liquid into the function generator.

Do not use chemicals containing harsh products such as benzene, toluene, xylene, and acetone.









Location: Indoor, no direct sunlight, dust free, almost non-conductive pollution (Note below) and avoid strong magnetic fields.

Relative Humidity: < 80%

Altitude: < 2000m

Temperature: 0°C to 40°C

(Pollution Degree) EN 61010-1:2010 specifies pollution degrees and their requirements as follows. The function generator falls under degree 2.

Pollution refers to “addition of foreign matter, solid, liquid, or gaseous (ionized gases), that may produce a reduction of dielectric strength or surface resistivity”.

 Pollution degree 1: No pollution or only dry, non-conductive pollution occurs. The pollution has no influence.

 Pollution degree 2: Normally only non-conductive pollution occurs. Occasionally, however, a temporary conductivity caused by condensation must be expected.

 Pollution degree 3: Conductive pollution occurs, or dry, nonconductive pollution occurs which becomes conductive due to condensation which is expected. In such conditions, equipment is normally protected against exposure to direct sunlight, precipitation, and full wind pressure, but neither temperature nor humidity is controlled.







Location: Indoor

Relative Humidity: < 70%

Temperature: -10°C to 70°C

9

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Disposal

Class A Device

WARNING

Do not dispose this instrument as unsorted municipal waste. Please use a separate collection facility or contact the supplier from which this instrument was purchased. Please make sure discarded electrical waste is properly recycled to reduce environmental impact.

The AFG-30XX function generators are categorized as Class A equipment. Class A equipment is intended for use in an industrial environment.

Class A equipment may have potential difficulties in ensuring electromagnetic compatibility in other environments, due to conducted as well as radiated disturbances.

10


Power cord for the United Kingdom

When using the function generator in the United Kingdom, make sure the power cord meets the following safety instructions.

NOTE: This lead/appliance must only be wired by competent persons

WARNING: THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED

IMPORTANT: The wires in this lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:

Green/ Yellow: Earth

Blue:

Brown:

Neutral

Live (Phase)

As the colours of the wires in main leads may not correspond with the coloured marking identified in your plug/appliance, proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured Green & Yellow must be connected to the Earth terminal marked with either the letter E, the earth symbol or coloured

Green/Green & Yellow.

The wire which is coloured Blue must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured Blue or Black.

The wire which is coloured Brown must be connected to the terminal marked with the letter L or P or coloured Brown or Red.

If in doubt, consult the instructions provided with the equipment or contact the supplier.

This cable/appliance should be protected by a suitably rated and approved

HBC mains fuse: refer to the rating information on the equipment and/or user instructions for details. As a guide, a cable of 0.75mm

2 should be protected by a 3A or 5A fuse. Larger conductors would normally require

13A types, depending on the connection method used.

Any exposed wiring from a cable, plug or connection that is engaged in a live socket is extremely hazardous. If a cable or plug is deemed hazardous, turn off the mains power and remove the cable, any fuses and fuse assemblies. All hazardous wiring must be immediately destroyed and replaced in accordance to the above standard.

11

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

G

ETTING STARTED

The Getting started chapter introduces the function generator’s main features, appearance, set up procedure and power-up.

Note: Throughout this manual, “AFG-30XX” refers to the AFG-3021, AFG-3022, AFG-3031 &

AFG-3032, unless stated otherwise.

Main Features

Model name

AFG-3021

AFG-3022

AFG-3031

AFG-3032

Performance

Frequency bandwidth

20MHz

20MHz

Channels

1(signal ground chassis isolation)

2 (signal ground chassis isolation and channel isolation)

30MHz

30MHz

1(signal ground chassis isolation)

2 (signal ground chassis isolation and channel isolation)









DDS Function Generator series

1μHz high frequency resolution maintained at full range

1ppm frequency stability

Full Function Arbitrary Waveform Capability

-250 MSa/s sample rate

-125 MSa/s repetition rate

-8 M-point waveform length

-16-bit amplitude resolution

12

Features

GETTING STARTED



-Ten 8 M waveform memories

-True waveform output to display

-User define output section

-D W R (Direct Waveform Reconstruction) capability

-Waveform editing capability sans PC

-N Cycle and Infinite output mode selectable

-60dBc low distortion sine wave



























Sine, Square, Triangle, Pulse, Ramp, Noise, DC standard waveforms

Int/Ext AM, FM, PWM, FSK, PM, SUM modulation

Modulation/sweep signal output

Burst function with internal and external triggers

Store/recall 10 groups of setting memories

Output overload protection

Two channel tracking (AFG-3022/3032 only)

42Vpk signal ground chassis isolation and

42Vpk channel isolation

Multi-unit synchronized control

DSO Link function to transfer captured waveforms from the DSO to the function generator

Harmonic waveform function

Pulse waveform with configurable rise times & fall times

Frequency and amplitude sweep

13

Interface

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual







Interface: Standard: LAN, USB Optional: GPIB

4.3 inch color TFT LCD (480 × 272) Graphical

User Interface

AWES (Arbitrary Waveform Editing Software)

PC software

14

GETTING STARTED

Panel Overview

Front Panel

AFG-3021/3031

LCD Display Number pad

A F G -3 0 3 1

Scroll Wheel

Arbitrary Function Generator

1

0

7

4

8

5

2

9

6

/

3

MAIN

Output

Waveform FREQ/Rate AMPL DC Offset

ARB MOD Sweep Burst

UTIL

Preset

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6

Selection keys

MOD

42V

MAX

SYNC

42V

MAX

50

W

MAIN

42V

MAX

50

W

Power Switch

Output

Terminals

Output key

Function keys Operation keys

Output indicators

AFG-3022/3032

LCD Display Number pad

A F G -3 0 3 2

Arbitrary Function Generator

Scroll Wheel

CH1/CH2

1

0

7

4

8

5

2

/

9

6

3

CH2

CH1

CH2

Output

CH1

Output

Waveform FREQ/Rate AMPL DC Offset

ARB MOD Sweep Burst

UTIL

Preset

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6

Selection keys

SYNC

42V

MAX

50

W

CH2

42V

MAX

50

W

CH1

42V

MAX

50

W

USB port

Power Switch

Output

Terminals

Output keys

Function keys Operation keys

Output indicators

USB port

15

LCD display

Function keys:

F1~F6

Operation keys

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

TFT color LCD display, 480 x 272 resolution.

F 1

Waveform

Activates the functions which appear in the bottom of the LCD display.

Waveform is used to select a waveform type.

FREQ/Rate

AMPL

DC Offset

The FREQ/Rate key is used to set the frequency or sample rate.

AMPL sets the waveform amplitude.

Sets the DC offset.

UTIL

ARB

MOD

Sweep

The UTIL key is used to access the save and recall options, set the remote interface (USB, GPIB,

LAN), use DSO link (AFG-

3021/3031), update and view the firmware version, access the calibration options, output impedance settings (AFG-

3021/3031 only), set the language and access the help menu.

ARB is used to set the arbitrary waveform parameters.

The MOD, Sweep and Burst keys are used to set the modulation, sweep and burst settings and parameters.

Burst

Preset

Preset

The preset key is used to recall a preset state.

16

Main Output

(AFG-3021/3031)

CH1/CH2

Output

(AFG-3022/3032)

MAIN

Output

CH1

Output

CH1/CH2

(AFG-3022/3032)

CH1

CH2

Output indicators

GETTING STARTED

The Output key is used to turn on or off the waveform output.

CH1/CH2 Output key. These keys are used to turn the output on or off for each individual channel.

The CH1/CH2 keys are used to access the DSO link function, output impedance settings and phase settings for the AFG-3022 &

AFG-3032.

When an Output indicator is green, it indicates that the output is active.

USB host connector

The USB Host connector is used to save and restore data as well as update the firmware.

17

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Output terminals

(AFG-3021/3031)

MOD

42V

MAX

SYNC

42V

MAX

50

W

Modulation output terminal for the AM, FM, PWM, PM, SUM or sweep function.

The SYNC output terminal outputs a TTL logic level signal in phase with the zero phase position of the main output. 50Ω output impedance.

Output terminals

(AFG-3022/3032)

MAIN

42V

MAX

50

W

The primary output terminal. 50Ω output impedance.

Note: The MAIN ground has a common ground with the MOD output, SYNC and MOD input terminals. They are also isolated from the chassis ground and the 10MHz REF IN ground by an isolation voltage of 42Vpk.

SYNC

42V

MAX

50

W

The SYNC output terminal outputs a TTL logic level signal in phase with the zero phase position of the CH1 output. 50Ω output impedance.

CH2

42V

MAX

50

W

CH2 output terminal. 50Ω output impedance.

CH1

42V

MAX

50

W

CH1 output terminal. 50Ω output impedance.

Note: The CH1, CH2 and 10MHz REF IN ground are isolated from each other and from the chassis ground by an isolation voltage of 42Vpk.

The CH1 ground has a common ground with the

MOD output, SYNC and the CH1 MOD input terminals.

The CH2 ground has a common ground with the

CH2 MOD input terminal.

18

Standby key

Selection keys

Scroll Wheel

Keypad

GETTING STARTED

The standby key is used to turn the function generator on (green) or to put the function generator into standby mode (red).

Used to select digits when editing parameters.

The scroll wheel is used to edit values and parameters.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

Decrease Increase

The digital keypad is used to enter values and parameters. The keypad is often used in conjunction with the selection keys and variable knob.

19

Rear Panel

AFG-3021/3031

GPIB

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Fan Power Switch

OUT

GPIB

WARNING

To avoid electric shock the power cord protective grounding conductor

For continued fire protection. Replace only with specified type and rated fuse.

No operator serviceable components inside.

Do not remove covers. Refer servicing to qualified personnel.

MOD

INPUT

Trigger

IN

42V

MAX

LAN

Disconnect power cord and test leads before replacing fuse

FUSE RATING

AC 250V

T 0.63A

AC 100 240V

50 60Hz 50VA

Power socket and fuse

OUT and IN

10MHz REF

AFG-3022/3032

MOD

Input

GPIB Fan

Trigger

Input

LAN

LAN USB port

USB port Power Switch

REF

10MHz

IN

42V

MAX

OUT

GPIB

WARNING

To avoid electric shock the power cord protective grounding conductor must be connected to ground.




Trigger

CH2

MOD

INPUT

MOD

CH1 Trigger

LAN


FUSE RATING

AC 250V

T 1A

AC 100 240V

50 60Hz 85VA

OUT and IN

10MHz REF

10MHz REF OUT

10MHz REF IN

CH2 MOD &

Trigger Input

REF

CH1 MOD &

Trigger Input

OUT

IN

42V

MAX

10 MHz reference output.

10 MHz reference input.

20

Power socket and fuse

Trigger Input

MOD input

Fan

Power Socket

Input and fuse

Power Switch

USB B port

LAN port

GETTING STARTED

Trigger External trigger input. Used to receive external trigger signals. For the AFG-3022/3032 there is a separate trigger input for CH1 and

CH2.

MOD Modulation input terminal. For the

AFG-3022/3032 there is a separate modulation input for CH1 and

CH2.

Note: The CH1/CH2 MOD input terminals are isolated from each other and from the chassis ground by an isolation voltage of 42Vpk.

The CH1 MOD input shares ground with the CH1 ground.

The CH2 MOD input shares ground with the CH2 ground.

Power input: 100-240V AC

50-60Hz.

Fuse:

AFG-3022/3032: T1A/250V

AFG-3021/AFG-3031: T0.63A/250V

For the fuse replacement procedure,

see page 406.

Main power switch.

LAN

The USB B connector is used to connect the function generator to a

PC for remote control.

Ethernet port used for remote control (RJ45 connector).

21

GPIB

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

GPIB 24 pin female GPIB connector for PC remote control.

22

GETTING STARTED

Display

CH2

Parameter

Window

CH1

Parameter

Window

CH2

Waveform

Display

CH1

Waveform

Display

Soft Menu Keys

Parameter

Windows

These windows are used to edit the parameter values for CH1 and CH2.

Waveform Display The Waveform Display is used give an indication of the expected waveform output for each channel.

Soft Menu Keys The function keys (F1~F6) below the Soft Menu keys correspond to the soft keys.

23

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Setting up the Function Generator

Background This section describes how to adjust the handle and power up the function generator.

Adjusting the stand

Pull out the handle sideways and rotate it.

Place the unit horizontally, or tilt the stand.

Place the handle vertically to hand carry.

24

GETTING STARTED

Power Up 1. Connect the power cord to the socket on the rear panel.

2. Turn on the power switch on the rear panel.

3. Press and hold the Standby key on the front panel to turn the machine on. The standby key will change from red (standby) to green

(on).

Standby On

4. When the standby key turns green, the instrument will turn on showing a loading screen.

The function generator is now ready to be used.

25

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

26

Q

UICK REFERENCE

This chapter lists operation shortcuts, built-in help coverage, and default factory settings. Use this chapter as a quick reference for instrument functions. For detailed explanations on parameters,

settings and limitations, please see the Operation chapter(page 70),

Modulation chapter(page 90), Secondary System Function Settings

chapter (page 159), Dual Channel & Multi-Unit Operation

chapter(page 178) or the Specifications (page 407).

How to use the Digital Inputs ............................................ 28

How to use the Help Menu................................................ 29

Selecting a Waveform ........................................................ 32

Square Wave ........................................................................ 32

Triangle Wave ....................................................................... 32

Sine Wave ............................................................................. 33

Pulse Wave ........................................................................... 33

Noise Wave .......................................................................... 34

Harmonic Wave ................................................................... 34

Modulation ........................................................................ 36

AM ........................................................................................ 36

FM ........................................................................................ 37

FSK Modulation ................................................................... 38

PM ........................................................................................ 39

SUM Modulation ................................................................. 40

PWM Modulation ................................................................. 41

Sweep ................................................................................ 42

Burst ................................................................................. 43

ARB ................................................................................... 44

ARB – Add Built-In Waveform ............................................. 44

ARB – Add Built-In Waveform - Pulse ................................. 44

ARB - Add Point ................................................................... 45

ARB - Add Line ..................................................................... 45

ARB – Output Section .......................................................... 46

ARB – Output N Cycle ......................................................... 46

ARB – Output Infinite Cycles ............................................... 47

QUICK REFERENCE

Utility Menu ...................................................................... 48

Save ...................................................................................... 48

Recall .................................................................................... 48

Interface GPIB ...................................................................... 48

Interface LAN ....................................................................... 49

Interface USB........................................................................ 49

Dual Channel – Frequency Coupling ................................... 49

Dual Channel – Amplitude Coupling ................................... 49

Dual Channel – Tracking ...................................................... 50

Menu Tree ......................................................................... 51

Waveform ............................................................................. 51

Waveform - Pulse ................................................................. 52

Waveform - More ................................................................. 52

ARB-Display .......................................................................... 53

ARB-Edit................................................................................ 54

ARB-Built-in .......................................................................... 55

ARB-Built in-Basic ................................................................ 56

ARB-Save .............................................................................. 57

ARB-Load .............................................................................. 57

ARB-Output .......................................................................... 58

MOD ..................................................................................... 59

Sweep - Type/MOD = Frequency ......................................... 60

Sweep - More ........................................................................ 60

Sweep - Type/MOD = Amplitude......................................... 61

Burst – N Cycle ..................................................................... 62

Burst - Gate .......................................................................... 62

CH1 / CH2 (AFG-3022/AFG-3032 Only) ............................. 63

UTIL (AFG-3021/3031) ........................................................ 63

UTIL (AFG-3022/AFG-3032) ................................................ 64

UTIL - Interface ..................................................................... 64

UTIL - Interface - LAN .......................................................... 65

UTIL - Interface - LAN - Config - Manual ............................. 66

UTIL - System ....................................................................... 66

UTIL - Dual Channel ............................................................. 67

Default Settings ................................................................ 68

27

QUICK REFERENCE

How to use the Digital Inputs

Background The AFG-30XX has three main types of digital inputs: the number pad, selection keys and scroll wheel. The following instructions will show you how to use the digital inputs to edit parameters.

1. To select a menu item, press the corresponding function keys below (F1~F6). In the example below, the F1 function key corresponds to the

Soft key “Sine”.

2. To edit a digital value, use the selector key to move the cursor to the digit that needs to be edited.

3. Use the scroll wheel to edit the digit under the cursor.

Clockwise increases the value, counterclockwise decreases the value.

4. Alternatively, the number pad can be used to set the value of a highlighted parameter.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

28

QUICK REFERENCE

How to use the Help Menu

Background Every key and function has a detailed description in the help menu.

1. Press UTIL.

UTIL

2. Press System (F4)[F5 for the

AFG-3021/3031].

System F 4

3. Press More (F5).

More

F 5

4. Press Help (F2).

Help F 2

5. Use the scroll wheel to navigate to a help item. Press

Select to choose the item.

Keypad

Arbitrary

Waveform

Provides help on any front panel key that is pressed.

Explains how to create arbitrary waveforms.

29

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Modulation

Function

Explains how to create

Modulated waveforms.

Sweep Function Provides help on the Sweep function.

Burst Function Provides help on the Burst function.

DSO Link Provides help on DSO link.

Hardcopy Explains how to use the

Hardcopy function.

Dual Channel Describes how to perform frequency or amplitude tracking for the AFG-3022/3032.

6. For example select item 5 to see help on the sweep function.

30

QUICK REFERENCE

7. Use the scroll wheel to navigate to each help page.

8. Press F6 to return to the previous menus.

Return

F 6

31

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Selecting a Waveform

Square Wave

Example: Square wave, 3Vpp, 75%duty, 1 kHz

Output

Input: N/A

CH1

42V

MAX

50

W

1. Press the Waveform key and select Square

(F2).

2. Press Duty(F1), followed by 7 + 5 +

%(F5)

Waveform Square

Duty 7 5

3. Press the FREQ/Rate key, followed by 1 + kHz (F5).

FREQ/Rate 1 kHz

%

4. Press the AMPL key, followed by 3 + VPP

(F6).

5. Press the output key.

AMPL

Output

3 VPP

Triangle Wave

Example: Triangle wave, 5Vpp, 10kHz

Output

Input: N/A

CH1

42V

MAX

50

W

1. Press the Waveform key and select

Triangle (F3).

Waveform

2. Press the FREQ/Rate key, followed by 1 + 0

+ kHz (F5).

FREQ/Rate

Triangle

1 0 kHz

32

QUICK REFERENCE

3. Press the AMPL key, followed by 5 +VPP

(F6).


AMPL

Output

5 Vpp

Sine Wave

Example: Sine wave, 10Vpp, 100kHz

Output

Input: N/A

CH1

42V

MAX

50

W

1. Press the Waveform key and select Sine

(F1).

Waveform


+0 + kHz (F5).

FREQ/Rate

1 0

Sine

0 kHz

3. Press the AMPL key, followed by 1 + 0

+VPP (F6).

AMPL 1 0 VPP


Output

Pulse Wave

Example: Pulse wave, 10Vpp, 100kHz, 5us pulse width

Output

Input: N/A

CH1

42V

MAX

50

W


+0 + kHz (F5).

FREQ/Rate

1 0

2. Press the Waveform key and select Pulse

(F4).

Waveform

0

Pulse kHz

33

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

3. Press Width (F1), followed by 5 + uSEC

(F3).

Width

4. Press the AMPL key, followed by 1 + 0

+VPP (F6).


AMPL

Output

1

5

0 uSEC

VPP

Noise Wave

Example: White noise output

Output

Input: N/A

CH1

42V

MAX

50

W

1. Press the Waveform key and select More

(F6), Noise (F1).


Waveform More

Output

Noise

Harmonic Wave

Example: 10kHz harmonic sine wave, odd & even (all) harmonics, up to the 3rd order (2nd(5Vpp), 3rd(2Vpp), 0º phase.

Output

Input: N/A

CH1

42V

MAX

50

W

1. Press the Waveform key and select More

(F6), Harmonic (F2).

2. Press Total (F1), followed by 3 + Enter

(F1).

Waveform More

Total 3

Harmonic

Enter

3. Press Type (F2), ALL

(F3).

Type ALL

34

QUICK REFERENCE

4. Press Order (F3).

Order

5. Press Order (F1), followed by 2 + Enter

(F1).

Press Amp(F2), followed by 5 +

VPP (F2).

Order

Ampl

Phase

Press Phase(F3), followed by 0 +

Degree (F1).

5

2

0

6. Press the Order (F1), followed by 3 + Enter

(F1).

Press Amp(F2), followed by 2 +

VPP (F2).

Order

Ampl

Phase

Press Phase(F3), followed by 0 +

Degree (F1).


Output

2

3

0

Enter

VPP

VPP

Degree

Enter

Degree

35

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Modulation

AM

Example: AM modulation. 100Hz modulating square wave. 1kHz

Sine wave carrier. 80% modulation depth.

Output

Input: N/A

CH1

42V

MAX

50

W

1. Press the MOD key and select AM (F1).

2. Press Waveform and select Sine (F1).

MOD

Waveform

3. Press the Freq/Rate key, followed by 1 + kHz (F5).

FREQ/Rate

1

AM

Sine

4. Press the MOD key, select AM (F1), Shape

(F4), Square (F2).

MOD

Square

AM

5. Press the MOD key, select AM (F1), AM

Freq (F3).

MOD

AM kHz

Shape

AM Freq

6. Press 1 + 0 + 0 + Hz

(F2).

8. Press 8 + 0 + % (F1).

1

7. Press the MOD key, select AM (F1), Depth

(F2).

MOD

8

0

0

AM

0

%

Hz

Depth

36

QUICK REFERENCE

9. Press MOD, AM (F1),

Source (F1), INT (F1).

MOD

INT

AM


Output

Source

FM

Example: FM modulation. 100Hz modulating square wave. 1kHz sine wave carrier. 100 Hz frequency deviation. Internal source.

Output

Input: N/A

CH1

42V

MAX

50

W

1. Press the MOD key and select FM (F2).


MOD

Waveform

FM

Sine


5. Press the MOD key, select FM (F2), FM

Freq (F3).

FREQ/Rate

4. Press the MOD key, select FM (F2), Shape

(F4), Square (F2).

MOD

Square

FM

MOD

1

FM kHz

Shape

FM Freq

6. Press 1 + 0 + 0 + Hz

(F2).

7. Press the MOD key, select FM (F2), Freq

Dev (F2).

1

MOD

0

FM

0 Hz

Freq Dev

37

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

8. Press 1 + 0 + 0 + Hz

(F3).

9. Press MOD, FM (F2),


1 0

MOD

INT

FM

0


Output

Hz

Source

FSK Modulation

Example: FSK modulation. 100Hz hop frequency. 1kHz carrier wave. Triangle wave. 10 Hz rate. Internal source.

Output

Input: N/A

CH1

42V

MAX

50

W

1. Press the MOD key and select FSK (F3).

2. Press Waveform and select Triangle (F3).

MOD

FSK

Waveform

Triangle


FREQ/Rate

1 kHz

4. Press the MOD key, select FSK (F3), FSK

Rate (F3).

5. Press 1 + 0 + Hz (F2).

MOD

1 0

FSK

Hz

FSK Rate

6. Press the MOD key, select FSK (F3), Hop

Freq (F2).

7. Press 1 + 0 + 0 + Hz

(F3).

MOD

1 0

FSK

0

Hop Freq

Hz

38

QUICK REFERENCE

8. Press MOD, FSK (F3),


MOD

INT

FSK


Output

Source

PM

Example: PM modulation. 100Hz phase frequency. Sine wave shape.

180° phase deviation. 1kHz sine wave carrier.

Output

Input: N/A

CH1

42V

MAX

50

W

1. Press the MOD key and select PM (F4).


MOD

Waveform

PM

Sine


4. Press the MOD key, select PM (F4), Shape

(F4), Sine (F1).

FREQ/Rate

MOD

Sine

1

PM

5. Press the MOD key, select PM (F4), PM

Freq (F3).

6. Press 1 + 0 + 0 + Hz

(F2).

MOD

1 0

PM

0 kHz

Shape

PM Freq

Hz

7. Press the MOD key, select PM (F4), Phase

Dev (F2).

MOD

PM Phase Dev

39

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

8. Press 1 + 8 + 0 +

Degree (F1).

1 8 0 Degree

SUM Modulation

Example: SUM modulation. 100Hz SUM frequency. 50% SUM amplitude. 1kHz carrier sine wave. Triangle wave shape. Internal source.

Output

Input: N/A

CH1

42V

MAX

50

W

1. Press the MOD key and select SUM (F5).


MOD

Waveform


FREQ/Rate 1

SUM

Sine kHz

4. Press the MOD key, select SUM (F5), SUM

Freq (F3).

MOD

5. Press 1 + 0 + 0 + Hz

(F2).

1 0

SUM

0

SUM Freq

Hz

6. Press the MOD key, select SUM (F5), SUM

Ampl (F2).

MOD

7. Press 5 + 0 + % (F1).

5 0

SUM SUM Ampl

%

8. Press the MOD key, select SUM (F5),

Shape (F4), Triangle

(F3).

MOD

Triangle

SUM Shape

40

QUICK REFERENCE

9. Press MOD, SUM

(F5), Source (F1), INT

(F1).


MOD

INT

Output

SUM Source

PWM Modulation

Example: PWM modulation. 800Hz carrier wave. 15 kHz modulating sine wave. 50% duty cycle. Internal source.

Output

CH1

42V

MAX

50

W

1. Press Waveform and select Square (F2).

2. Press the MOD key and select PWM (F6).

Waveform

MOD

Square

PWM

Input: N/A 3. Press the FREQ/Rate key, followed by 8 + 0

+ 0 + Hz (F4).

FREQ/Rate

Hz

8

4. Press the MOD key, select PWM (F6),

Shape (F4), Sine (F1).

MOD

Sine

PWM

0 0

Shape

5. Press the MOD key,

PWM (F6), PWM

Freq (F3).

MOD

PWM PWM Freq

6. Press 1 + 5 + kHz

(F3).

7. Press MOD, PWM

(F6), Duty (F2).

8. Press 5 + 0 + % (F1).

1

MOD

5

5

0

PWM kHz

%

Duty

41

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

MOD

INT

PWM


Output

Sweep

Example: Frequency sweep. Start frequency 10mHz, stop frequency

1MHz. Log sweep, 1 second sweep, manual trigger.

Output

9. Press MOD, PWM

(F6), Source (F1), INT

(F1).

CH1

42V

MAX

50

W

1. Press Sweep, Start

(F3).

2. Press 1 + 0 + mHz

(F2).

Sweep

1 0

Start

Source mHz

Input: N/A

3. Press Sweep, Stop

(F4).

4. Press 1 + MHz (F5).

Sweep

1

Stop

MHz

5. Press Sweep,

Type/MOD (F2),

Functions (F3), Log

(F2).

Sweep

Log

Type/MOD Functions

6. Press Sweep, SWP

Time (F5).

7. Press 1 + SEC (F2).

Sweep SWP Time

1 SEC

8. Press Sweep, TRIG

Type (F6), Manual

(F3).

Sweep

TRIG Type Manual

42

QUICK REFERENCE


Output

10. Press Trigger (F1).

Trigger

Burst

Example: Burst mode, N-Cycle (Internally triggered), 1kHz burst frequency, burst count = 5, 10 ms burst period, 0 ˚ burst phase, internal trigger, 10 us delay.

Output

Input: N/A

CH1

42V

MAX

50

W

1. Press FREQ/Rate 1 kHz (F5).

2. Press Burst, N Cycle

(F1), Cycles (F1).

3. Press 5 + Cyc (F5).

FREQ/Rate

Burst

5

1

N Cycle

Cyc kHz

Cycles


(F1), Period (F4).

5. Press 1 + 0 + msec

(F2).


(F1), Phase (F3).

Burst

1

Burst

0

N Cycle mSEC

N Cycle

Period

Phase

7. Press 0 + Degree (F5).

0 Degree


(F1), TRIG Setup (F5),

INT (F1).

Burst

INT

N Cycle Trig Setup

43

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual


(F1), TRIG Setup (F5),

Delay (F4).

Burst

Delay

N Cycle Trig Setup

10. Press 1 + 0 + uSEC

(F2).


1

Output

0 uSEC

ARB

ARB – Add Built-In Waveform

Example: ARB Mode, exponential rise. Start 0, length 100, scale

32767.

Output

CH1

42V

MAX

50

W

1. Press ARB, Built in

(F3), Basic (F1), More

(F5), Exp Rise (F1).

2. Press Start (F1), 0 +

Enter (F5).

3. Press Length (F2),

100, Enter (F5).

ARB

More

Start

Built in

Exp Rise

0

Length 1

Enter Return

0

Basic

Enter

0

4. Press Scale (F3),

32767, Enter (F5),

Done (F4).

Scale

6 7

3 2

Enter

7

Done

ARB – Add Built-In Waveform - Pulse

Example: ARB Mode, Pulse. Start 0, Frequency 1kHz, Duty 25%.

44

QUICK REFERENCE

Output

CH1

42V

MAX

50

W

1. Press ARB, Built in

(F3), Basic (F1), More

(F5), Pulse (F4).

ARB

More

2. Press Frequency (F1),

1, kHz (F5).

Frequency

Built in

Pulse

1

Basic kHz

3. Press Duty (F2), 25,

%(F5).

Duty

%

2

Return

5

ARB - Add Point

Example: ARB Mode, Add point, Address 40, data 30,000.

Output

CH1

42V

MAX

50

W

1. Press ARB, Edit (F2),

Point (F1), Address

(F1).

2. Press 4 + 0 + Enter

(F5).

ARB

Address

Edit

4 0

Point

Enter Return

3. Press Data (F2),

3+0+0+0+0, Enter

(F5).

0

Data

0

3 0

Enter

0

ARB - Add Line

Example: ARB Mode, add line, address: data (10:30, 50:100)

Output

CH1

42V

MAX

50

W

1. Press ARB, Edit (F2),

Line (F2), Start ADD

(F1).

2. Press 1 + 0 + Enter

(F5).

ARB

Start ADD

1 0

Edit Line

Enter Return

45

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

3. Press Start Data (F2),

3 + 0, Enter (F5).

Start Data

Enter

3

Return

0

4. Press Stop ADD (F3),

5 + 0, Enter (F5).

Stop ADD

Enter

5

Return

0

5. Press Stop Data (F4),

1 + 0 + 0, Enter (F5),

Done (F5).

Stop Data

Enter

1

Done

0 0

ARB – Output Section

Example: ARB Mode, output ARB waveform, start 0, length 1000.

Output

CH1

42V

MAX

50

W

1. Press ARB, Output

(F6).


Enter (F5).

ARB Output

Start 0 Enter

3. Press Length (F2), 1 +

0 + 0 + 0, Enter (F5).

Length

0

1 0

Enter Return

0

ARB – Output N Cycle

Example: ARB Mode, Output N Cycle, Start 0, Length 1000, N Cycle

10.

Output

CH1

42V

MAX

50

W


(F6).


Enter (F5).

ARB

Start

Output

0 Enter

46

QUICK REFERENCE


0 + 0, Enter (F5).

Length

0

1 0

Enter Return

0

4. Press N Cycle (F4).

N Cycle

5. Press Cycles (F1), 1 +

0, Enter (F5).

Cycles 1 0 Enter Return

6. To trigger the output once, press Trigger

(F5).

Trigger

ARB – Output Infinite Cycles

Example: ARB Mode, output N cycle, start 0, length 1000, cycles infinite.

Output

CH1

42V

MAX

50

W


(F6).


Enter (F5).

ARB

Output

Start 0 Enter


0 + 0, Enter (F5).

Length

0

1 0

Enter Return

0

4. Press Infinite (F5).

Infinite

47

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Utility Menu

Save

Example: Save to memory file #5.

1. Press UTIL, Memory

(F1).

2. Choose a file using the scroll wheel and press Store (F1), press

Done (F5).

UTIL

Memory

Store Done

Recall

Example: Recall memory file #5.

1. Press UTIL, Memory

(F1).

2. Choose a file using the scroll wheel and press Recall (F2), press Done (F5).

UTIL

Memory

Recall Done

Interface GPIB

Example: GPIB interface, address 10.

GPIB

GPIB

1. Press UTIL, Interface

(F2), GPIB (F1),

Address (F1).

UTIL

Address

Interface

2. Press 1 + 0 + Done

(F5).

1 0

GPIB

Done

48

Interface LAN

Example: LAN interface, DHCP IP configuration.

QUICK REFERENCE

LAN

LAN


(F2), LAN (F3).

2. Press Config (F2),

DHCP (F1).

3. Press Done (F3).

UTIL

Config

Interface

Done

DHCP

LAN

Interface USB

Example: USB interface.


(F2), USB (F2).

USB B

UTIL Interface USB

Dual Channel – Frequency Coupling

Example: 1kHz offset coupling. AFG-3022, 3032 only.

Output

CH1

42V

MAX

50

W

1. Press UTIL, Dual Ch

(F5), Freq Cpl (F1).

2. Press Offset (F2), 1 +

0 + kHz (F4).

UTIL

Offset

Dual Ch Freq Cpl

1 kHz

Dual Channel – Amplitude Coupling

Example: Amplitude coupling. AFG-3022, 3032 only.

Output 1. Press UTIL, Dual Ch

(F5), Ampl Cpl (F2).

UTIL

Dual Ch Ampl

49

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

CH1

42V

MAX

50

W

2. Press ON (F1).

ON

Dual Channel – Tracking

Example: Inverted tracking. AFG-3022, 3032 only.

Output

CH1

42V

MAX

50

W

1. Press UTIL, Dual Ch

(F5), Tracking (F3).

2. Press Inverted (F3).

UTIL

Inverted

Dual Ch Tracking

50

QUICK REFERENCE

Menu Tree

Convention Use the menu trees as a handy reference for the function generator functions and properties. The AFG-

3021/3022/3031/3032 menu system is arranged in a hierarchical tree. Each hierarchical level can be navigated with the operation or soft menu keys.

Pressing the Return soft key will return you to the previous menu level.

For example: To set the interface to USB;

(1)Press the UTIL key.

(2)The Interface soft-key.

(3) USB.

Level 1

Level 2

1

UTIL

2

Interface

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

GPIB

3

USB

Address

Clear

Done

Return

Return

LAN

Go to the

UTIL

–

Interface

–

LAN menu

Return

Waveform

Waveform

Sine Square

Duty

%

Return

Triangle Pulse

Go to the

Pulse menu

Ramp

SYM

%

Return

More

Go to the

More menu

51

Waveform - Pulse

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Waveform

Pulse

Width nSEC uSEC mSEC

SEC

Return

DUTY

%

Return

Waveform - More

Rise nSEC uSEC mSEC

SEC

Return

Waveform

More

Fall nSEC uSEC mSEC

SEC

Return

Edge Time Extended nSEC uSEC mSEC

SEC

Return

ON

OFF

Return

Noise Harmonic DC Return

Total

Enter

Return

Type

Even

Odd

All

User

OFF

ON

Return

Order

Order

Enter

Return

Ampl mVPP

VPP

Return

Phase

Degree

Return

Return

Display

Frequency

Time

Return

Return

52

ARB-Display

QUICK REFERENCE

ARB

Display

Horizon Vertical

Start

Clear

Enter

Return

Length

Clear

Enter

Return

Center

Clear

Enter

Return

Zoom in

Zoom out

Return

Low

Clear

Enter

Return

High

Clear

Enter

Return

Center

Clear

Enter

Return

Zoom in

Zoom out

Return

Next Page Back Page Overview Return

53

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

ARB-Edit

ARB

Edit

Point

Address

Clear

Enter

Return

Data

Clear

Enter

Return

Return

Line Copy

Start ADD

Clear

Enter

Return

Start Data

Clear

Enter

Return

Stop ADD

Clear

Enter

Return

Stop Data

Clear

Enter

Return

Done

Return

Start

Clear

Enter

Return

Length

Clear

Enter

Return

Paste To

Clear

Enter

Return

Done

Return

Clear

Start

Clear

Enter

Return

Length

Clear

Enter

Return

Done

All

Done

Return

Return

Protect

All

Done

Start

Clear

Enter

Return

Length

Clear

Enter

Return

Done

Unprotect

Done

Return

Return

54

QUICK REFERENCE

ARB-Built-in

Note: The following menu tree only lists where each built-in ARB waveform is located.

ARB

Built in

Basic Common 1 Common 2

Sine

Square

Ramp

Sinc

Exp Rise

Exp Fall

DC

Pulse abstan havercosine sinever abssin haversine stair_down absinehalf n_pulse stair_ud ampalt negramp stair_up attalt rectpuls stepresp diric_even roundhalf trapezia diric_odd sawtoot tripuls gauspuls sinetra

Math dlorentz ln sqrt since lorentz xsquare gauss

More

Trig arccos arctan sech arccot arctanh sinh arccsc cosh tan arcsec cot tanh arcsin csc arcsinh sec

Window barthannwin chebwin kaiser bartlett flattopwin triang blackman hamming tukeywin bohmanwin hann

Return

55

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

ARB-Built in-Basic

Note: For brevity, only the “Basic” menu tree is listed for the ARB >

Built-in menu tree system. The operation menu keys for all the other built-in ARB waveforms are mostly identical to the ones listed below.

ARB

Built in

Basic

Sine

Start

Clear

Enter

Return

Length

Clear

Enter

Return

Scale

Clear

Enter

Return

Done

Return

Square

Start

Clear

Enter

Return

Length

Clear

Enter

Return

Scale

Clear

Enter

Return

Done

Return

Ramp

Start

Clear

Enter

Return

Length

Clear

Enter

Return

Scale

Clear

Enter

Return

Done

Return

Sinc

Start

Clear

Enter

Return

Length

Clear

Enter

Return

Scale

Clear

Enter

Return

Done

Return

More

Go to ARB

Built in -

Basic

–

More menu

Return

56

QUICK REFERENCE

ARB-Save

ARB

Save

Start

Clear

Enter

Return

Length

Clear

Enter

Return

Memory

Select

Return

USB

Select

New Folder

Enter Char

Back Space

Save

Return

New File

Enter Char

Back Space

Save

Return

Return

Return

ARB-Load

ARB

Load

To

Clear

Enter

Return

Memory

Select

Return

USB

Select

Return

Return

57

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

ARB-Output

ARB

Output

Start

Clear

Enter

Return

Length

Clear

Enter

Return

Gate

Pos

Neg

Return

N Cycle

Cycles

Clear

Enter

Return

EXT

Manual

Trigger

Return

Infinite Return

58

QUICK REFERENCE

MOD

MOD

AM

Source

INT

EXT

Return

Depth

%

Return

AM Freq mHz

Hz kHz

Return

Shape

Sine

Square

Triangle

UpRamp

DnRamp

Return

Return

FM FSK PM SUM PWM

Source

INT

EXT

Return

Freq Dev uHz mHz

Hz kHz

MHz

Return

FM Freq mHz

Hz kHz

Return

Shape

Sine

Square

Triangle

UpRamp

DnRamp

Return

Return

Source

INT

EXT

Return

Hop Freq uHz mHz

Hz kHz

MHz

Return

FSK Rate mHz

Hz kHz

Return

Return

Phase Dev

Degree

Return

PM Freq mHz

Hz kHz

Return

Shape

Sine

Square

Triangle

UpRamp

DnRamp

Return

Return

Source

INT

EXT

Return

SUM Ampl

%

Return

SUM Freq mHz

Hz kHz

Return

Shape

Sine

Square

Triangle

UpRamp

DnRamp

Return

Return

Source

INT

EXT

Return

Duty

%

Return

PWM Freq mHz

Hz kHz

Return

Shape

Sine

Square

Triangle

UpRamp

DnRamp

Return

Return

59

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Sweep - Type/MOD = Frequency

SWEEP

TRIG Type Type/MOD

INT

EXT

Manual

Trigger

Return

OFF

TRIG Time mSEC

SEC

Return

Return

Type

Freq

Ampl

Return

Mode

Cont

Gate

Return

Functions

Linear

Log

Return

Sawtooth

Triangle

Return

Start uHz mHz

Hz kHz

MHz

Return

Sweep - More

Sweep

More

Stop uHz mHz

Hz kHz

MHz

Return

SWP Time mSEC

SEC

Return

More

Go to the

Sweep -

Frequency -

More menu

Span uHz mHz

Hz kHz

MHz

Return

Center uHz mHz

Hz kHz

MHz

Return

Return

60

Sweep - Type/MOD = Amplitude

SWEEP

QUICK REFERENCE

TRIG Type Type/MOD

INT

EXT

Manual

Trigger

Return

OFF

TRIG Time mSEC

SEC

Return

Return

Type

Freq

Ampl

Return

Mode

Cont

Gate

Return

Functions

Linear

Log

Return

Sawtooth

Triangle

Return

Start dBm mVRMS

VRMS mVPP

VPP

Return

Stop dBm mVRMS

VRMS mVPP

VPP

Return

SWP Time mSEC

SEC

Return

Return

61

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Burst – N Cycle

Burst

N Cycle

Cycles

Clear

Cyc

Return

Infinite Phase

Clear

Degree

Return

Period uSEC mSEC

SEC

Return

TRIG Setup Return

Int

EXT

Rise

Fall

Return

Manual

Trigger

Return

Delay nSEC uSEC mSEC

SEC

Return

Return

Burst - Gate

Burst

Gate

Polarity

Pos

Neg

Return

Phase

Clear

Degree

Return

Return

62

CH1 / CH2 (AFG-3022/AFG-3032 Only)

CH1

/

CH2

QUICK REFERENCE

Load Phase DSO-Link

50 OHM

High Z

Return

0 Phase

Sync Int

Degree

Align Phase

Return

Search

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

Return

UTIL (AFG-3021/3031)

UTIL

Memory

Store

Done

Return

Recall

Done

Return

Delete

Done

Return

Delete All

Done

Return

Return

Interface Cal.

Go to the

UTIL

–

Interface menu

Self Test

Software

Version

Upgrade

Return

Return

Load

50 OHM

High Z

Return

System

Go to the

UTIL

–

System menu

DSO-Link

Search

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH3

Return

63

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

UTIL (AFG-3022/AFG-3032)

UTIL

Memory Interface Cal.

Store

Done

Return

Recall

Done

Return

Delete

Done

Return

Delete All

Done

Return

Return

Go to the

UTIL –

Interface menu

Self Test

Software

Version

Upgrade

Return

Return

System Dual Ch

Go to the

UTIL –

System menu

Go to the

UTIL

– Dual

Ch menu

UTIL - Interface

UTIL

Interface

GPIB

Address

Clear

Done

Return

Return

USB LAN

Go to the

UTIL

–

Interface -

LAN menu

Return

64

UTIL - Interface - LAN

UTIL

Interface

LAN

Remote Config

DHCP

Auto IP

Manual

Go To

UTIL – Interface

– LAN Config –

Manual menu

Host Name

Enter Char

Done

Return

Done

Return

Done Return

QUICK REFERENCE

65

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

UTIL - Interface - LAN - Config - Manual

UTIL

Interface

LAN

Config

Manual

IP Addr

Done

Clear

Return

NetMask

Done

Clear

Return

Gateway

Done

Clear

Return

UTIL - System

UTIL

System

Done Return

Language Display Opt.

Clk Source

簡體中文

English

繁體中文

Return

Display

Suspend

ON

Return

Brightness

Enter

Return

Return

INT

EXT

EXT Sync

Return

Beep More

Power ON

Last

Default

Return

Help

Select

Return

Display

Single

Dual

Return

Return

66

UTIL - Dual Channel

UTIL

Dual Ch

Freq Cpl

OFF

Offset uHz mHz

Hz kHz

MHz

Return

Ratio

Enter

Return

Return

Ampl Cpl

ON

OFF

Return

Tracking

OFF

ON

Inverted

Return

Return

QUICK REFERENCE

67

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Default Settings

Here are the default panel settings which appear when pressing the Preset key.

Preset

Output Config. Function

Frequency

Amplitude

Offset

Output units

Output terminal

Sine wave

1kHz

3.000 Vpp

0.00V dc

Vpp

50Ω

Modulation

(AM/FM/FSK) Carrier Wave 1kHz Sine wave

Modulation waveforms 100Hz Sine wave

AM Depth

FM Deviation

FSK Hop Frequency

FSK Frequency

PWM Duty

PWM Frequency

Modem Status

100%

100Hz

100Hz

10Hz

50%

20kHz

Off

Sweep Start/Stop frequency 100Hz/1kHz

Sweep time 1s

Start/Stop amplitude 1.000/3.000 Vpp

Sweep function

Sweep status

Linear

Off

68

Burst Burst Frequency

Ncycle

Burst period

Burst starting phase

Burst status

Trigger Trigger source

Interface config. GPIB Address

Interface

LAN

Calibration Calibration Menu

1kHz

1

10ms

0 ˚

Off

QUICK REFERENCE

Internal (immediate)

10

USB

DHCP

Restricted

69

70

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

O

PERATION

The Operation chapter shows how to output basic waveform functions. For details on modulation, sweep, burst and arbitrary waveforms, please see the Modulation and Arbitrary waveform

chapters on pages 90 and 175. For information on the dual channel

and multi-unit operation, please see page 179 & 187, respectively.

Select a Channel ................................................................ 71

CH1/CH2 ............................................................................. 71

Select a Waveform ............................................................. 72

Sine Wave ............................................................................. 72

Setting a Square Wave ......................................................... 73

Triangle Wave ....................................................................... 74

Setting the Pulse Width ....................................................... 75

Setting the Pulse Rise & Fall Time ...................................... 76

Setting the Pulse Edge Time ................................................ 77

Setting the Pulse Duty Time ................................................ 78

Setting the Pulse Extended mode ........................................ 79

Setting a Ramp ..................................................................... 80

Noise Wave .......................................................................... 81

Harmonic Wave ................................................................... 81

Harmonic Order................................................................... 82

Harmonic Characteristics .................................................... 84

DC Wave ............................................................................... 85

Setting the Waveform Frequency ........................................ 86

Setting the Amplitude .......................................................... 88

Setting the DC Offset ........................................................... 89

OPERATION

Select a Channel

As the AFG-3022 or AFG-3032 are dual channel models, the desired output channel must first be selected before assigning the operation for that channel.

CH1/CH2

Panel Operation 1. Press the CH1 or CH2 key.

CH1

2. The selected channel will be visible while the deselected channel will be dimmed.

In the screen shot below, CH1 is selected.

71

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Select a Waveform

The AFG-30XX can output 8 standard waveforms: sine, square, triangle, pulse, ramp, noise, harmonic and DC waveforms.

Sine Wave

Panel Operation 1. Press the Waveform key.

2. Press F1 (Sine).

Waveform

Sine F 1

72

OPERATION

Setting a Square Wave


Waveform

2. Press F2 (Square) to create a square waveform.

3. Press F1 (Duty). The Duty parameter will be highlighted in the parameter window.

Square

DUTY

F 2

F 1

4. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the Duty range.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

Range

5. Press F5 (%) to choose % units.

Frequency

≤25MHz

(20MHz AFG-3021/3022)

25MHz~≤30MHz

%

Duty Range

20%~80%

40%~60%

F 5

73

Triangle Wave

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual


2. Press F3 (Triangle).

Waveform

Triangle

F 3

74

OPERATION

Setting the Pulse Width

The pulse width settings depend on the rise & fall time settings or the edge time setting and the period settings, as defined below:

Pulse Width - 0.625 * [(Rise Time - 0.6nS) + (Fall Time - 0.6nS)] ≧ 0

Period ≧ Pulse Width+ 0.625 * [(Rise Time - 0.6nS)+(Fall Time -

0.6nS)]

Pulse width is defined as the time from the 50% rising edge threshold to the 50% falling edge threshold of one full period.

Period

90%

90%

50% Pulse Width 50%

10%

10%

Rise time Fall time

See page 76 to set the rise and fall time settings and page 77 for the

edge time settings. Alternatively, instead of setting the pulse width,

the pulse duty can be set, see page 78 for details. The Extended

Mode function extends the setting range of the pulse duty to 0%-

100% and the setting range of the width to 0.00ns-1000ks (see page

79).


Waveform

2. Press F4 (Pulse) to create a pulse waveform.

Pulse F 4

3. Press F1 (Width). The Width parameter will be highlighted in the parameter window.

Width F 1

75

Range

Note

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

4. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the pulse width.

7

4

1

8

5

2

9

6

3

0 /

5. Press F2~F5 choose the unit range. nSEC

F 2

~

SEC

F 5

Pulse Width 20ns~999.83ks

Resolution: Freq < 25MHz

(20MHz AFG-3021/3022): 0.01ns pulse width (or 3 digit resolution)

Freq < 8.5 kHZ: 0.0001% duty cycle

Setting the Pulse Rise & Fall Time



3. Press F3 (Rise) or F4 (Fall).

The Rise or Fall parameter will be highlighted in the parameter window.

Waveform

Pulse F 4

Rise F 3

76

OPERATION

Range

Note

4. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the rise or fall time.

5. Press F2~F5 to choose the unit range.

7

4

1

0 nSEC

F 2

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

~

SEC

F 5

6. Repeat the above steps for the opposite edge time.

9.32ns ~ 799.89ks Minimum rise/fall time:

Duty

Considerations:

Width - 0.625 * [(Rise Time -

0.6nS) + (Fall Time - 0.6nS)] ≧ 0

Period ≧ Width+ 0.625 * [(Rise

Time - 0.6nS)+(Fall Time - 0.6nS)]

Setting the Pulse Edge Time

The edge time sets the rise and fall time to the same value. The edge time setting can affect the settable pulse width time.


Waveform


Pulse F 4

3. Press F5 (Edge Time). The

Edge Time parameter will be highlighted in the parameter window.

Edge Time F 5

77

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Range

Note

4. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the edge time.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

5. Press F2~F5 to choose the unit range.

Edge Time Range nSEC

F 2

9.32ns~799.89ks

~ mSEC

F 5

Duty

Considerations:

Width - 1.25 *

(Edge Time - 0.6nS) ≧ 0

Period≧Pulse Width +

1.25*(Edge time -0.6ns)

0.0001% duty cycle resolution

Setting the Pulse Duty Time

Instead of setting the pulse width of the pulse, the duty of the pulse can be set. The settable duty times depend on the rise & fall time settings, as defined below:

Duty ≧ 0.625×100×[rise time - 0.6ns +fall time - 0.6ns]/period

Or

Duty ≦ 100 - {62.5×[(rise time - 0.6ns) + (fall time - 0.6ns)]/period}


Waveform


Pulse F 4

3. Press F2 (DUTY). The DUTY parameter will be highlighted in the parameter window.

DUTY F2

78

OPERATION

Range

4. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the duty time.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

5. Press F1 to choose the % unit.

Duty Range

%

0.0170%~99.983%

Resolution 0.0001%

F 1

Setting the Pulse Extended mode

The Extended Mode function extends the setting range of the pulse duty and the width.


Waveform


Pulse F 4

Range

Note

Note

3. Press F6 (Extended) to enter the Extended menu.

F 6

4. Press F1 (ON) or F2 (OFF) to enable or disable the extended mode.

ON

OFF

F 1

F2

Duty Range (Extd.) 0.0000%~100.0000%

Resolution 0.0001%

Width Range (Extd.) 0.00ns~1,000ks

Loss may occur if the pulse width is beyond the setting range of the normal mode. The pulse may vanish at times.

The setting range of the rise and fall times are limited by the pulse width and the frequency as in normal mode.

79

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Setting a Ramp


Waveform

2. Press F5 (Ramp) to create a ramp waveform.

3. Press F1 (SYM). The SYM parameter will be highlighted in the parameter window.

4. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the symmetry percentage.

Ramp

SYM

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

F 5

F 1

Range


Symmetry 0%~100%

% F 5

80

Noise Wave


2. Press F6 (More).

3. Press F1 (Noise).

OPERATION

Waveform

More F 6

Noise

F 1

Harmonic Wave

The harmonic wave function creates a harmonic sine wave with a designated number of harmonics.


Waveform

2. Press F6 (More).

More F 6

3. Press F2 (Harmonic).

Harmonic F2

4. Press F1 (Total) to choose the total number of harmonics.

This includes the fundamental harmonic.

Total F1

81

Range

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

5. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the number of harmonics.

Number of harmonics 2 ~ 8

6. Press F1 (Enter).

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

Enter F1

Harmonic Order

After the total number of harmonics has been selected(above), you can also select which harmonic orders are used: odd, even, all or a user-defined set.


Waveform

2. Press F6 (More).

More F 6


Harmonic F2

4. Press F2 (Type).

Type F2

82

OPERATION

Range

5. Press F1 ~ F4 to chose which harmonic orders to include in the resultant harmonic waveform.

Even

F1

~

User

F4

Note: You may have to wait a short while for the meter to process the waveform.

Harmonic Even, Odd, ALL, User

Selecting User-

Defined Orders

1. If User was chosen, each order can be individually selected or deselected.

2. Turn the User defined orders on or off:

Turn the scroll wheel to move the cursor to the desired order in the “Type” parameter on the waveform display screen.





Selected orders are shown as green dots.

Deselected orders are shown as grey dots.

 The cursor is shown as a yellow dot.



<1

Orders are shown from 1 st (left side) to 8 th nd

, 3 rd

, 4 th

, 5 th

, 6 th

, 7 th

, 8 th

>

Selected orders

Cursor Deselected orders

3. Turn the selected order on or off using the F1 or F2 softkeys.

OFF

F1

ON

F2

83

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Harmonic Characteristics

The amplitude and phase of each harmonic order can individually set. By default the amplitude is the same as the fundamental frequency and the phase is set to 0º.


Waveform

2. Press F6 (More).

More F 6


Harmonic F2

4. Press F3 (Order).

Order F3

5. Press F1 (Order).

Order F1

6. The Order parameter will become highlighted in red.

7. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to select an order.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

8. Press F5 (Enter).

Enter F5

84

OPERATION

9. Press F2 (Amplitude).

Amplitude F2

10. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to set the amplitude of previously selected order.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

11. Choose the amplitude unit by pressing F4~F5. mVPP

F 2

~

VPP

F 6

12. Press F3 (Phase).

Phase F3

13. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to set the phase of the previously selected order.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

14. Press F5 (Degree).

Degree F5

DC Wave


2. Press F6 (More).

3. Press F3 (DC).

Waveform

More F 6

DC F3

85

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Setting the Waveform Frequency

Panel Operation 1. Press the FREQ/Rate key.

FREQ/Rate

2. The FREQ parameter will become highlighted in the parameter window.

Range

3. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the frequency.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

4. Choose a frequency unit by pressing F2~F6.

Sine uHz

F 2

1μHz~30MHz

(20MHz AFG-3021/3022)

~

MHz

F 6

Square

Triangle

Pulse

Ramp

1μHz~30MHz

(20MHz AFG-3021/3022)

1μHz~1MHz

1μHz~25MHz

(20MHz AFG-3021/3022)

1μHz~1MHz

86

OPERATION

87

88

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Setting the Amplitude

Panel Operation 1. Press the AMPL key.

AMPL

2. The AMPL parameter will become highlighted in the parameter window.

Range

3. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the amplitude.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

4. Choose a unit type by pressing F2~F6.

Range

Unit dBm

F 2

High Z

~

VPP

F 6

50 Ω load

1mVpp~10Vpp 2mVpp~20Vpp

Vpp, Vrms, dBm

OPERATION

Setting the DC Offset

Panel Operation 1. Press the DC Offset key.

DC Offset

2. The DC Offset parameter will become highlighted in the parameter window.

3. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the DC Offset.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

4. Press F5 (mVDC) or F6 (VDC) to choose a voltage range. mVDC

F 5

High Z

Range

50 Ω load

±5Vdc ±10Vdc

VDC

F 6

89

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

90

M

ODULATION

The AFG-3021, AFG-3022, AFG-3031 & AFG-3032 Arbitrary

Function Generators are able to produce AM, FM, FSK and PWM modulated waveforms as well as swept waveforms (frequency, amplitude) and burst waveforms. Depending on the type of waveform produced, different modulation parameters can be set.

Two different modulation modes can be active at the same time for the AFG-3022 & AFG-3032.

Amplitude Modulation (AM) ............................................. 92

Selecting AM Modulation .................................................... 93

AM Carrier Shape ................................................................. 93

Carrier Frequency ................................................................. 94

Modulating Wave Shape ...................................................... 95

AM Frequency ...................................................................... 96

Modulation Depth................................................................ 97

Selecting (AM) Modulation Source ..................................... 99

Frequency Modulation (FM) ............................................ 101

Selecting Frequency Modulation (FM) .............................. 102

FM Carrier Shape ............................................................... 102

FM Carrier Frequency ........................................................ 103

FM Wave Shape ................................................................. 104

Modulation Frequency ....................................................... 105

Frequency Deviation .......................................................... 106

Selecting (FM) Modulation Source ................................... 107

Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) Modulation ........................ 109

Selecting FSK Modulation ................................................. 110

FSK Carrier Shape .............................................................. 110

FSK Carrier Frequency ....................................................... 111

FSK Hop Frequency ........................................................... 112

FSK Rate ............................................................................. 113

FSK Source ......................................................................... 114

Phase Modulation (PM) .................................................. 116

Selecting Phase Modulation (PM) .................................... 117

PM Carrier Shape ............................................................... 117

PM Carrier Frequency ........................................................ 118

MODULATION

PM Wave Shape ................................................................. 119

Modulation Frequency ....................................................... 120

Phase Modulation Deviation ............................................. 121

SUM Modulation ............................................................. 122

Selecting SUM Modulation ................................................ 123

SUM Carrier Shape ............................................................. 123

SUM Carrier Frequency ...................................................... 124

SUM Modulating Wave Shape ........................................... 124

SUM Frequency .................................................................. 125

SUM Amplitude .................................................................. 126

SUM Source ....................................................................... 127

Pulse Width Modulation .................................................. 129

Selecting Pulse Width Modulation .................................... 130

PWM Carrier Shape ............................................................ 130

PWM Carrier Frequency ..................................................... 131

PWM Modulating Wave Shape .......................................... 131

Modulating Waveform Frequency...................................... 132

Modulation Duty Cycle ....................................................... 133

PWM Source ....................................................................... 134

Sweep .............................................................................. 136

Selecting Sweep Mode ....................................................... 137

Sweep Type ......................................................................... 137

Setting Start and Stop Frequency/Amplitude .................... 138

Center Frequency and Span ............................................... 139

Sweep Mode ....................................................................... 141

Sweep Function .................................................................. 141

Sweep Waveform Type ....................................................... 142

Sweep Time ........................................................................ 143

Sweep Trigger Source ......................................................... 145

Burst Mode ..................................................................... 147

Selecting Burst Mode ......................................................... 147

Burst Modes ....................................................................... 147

Burst Frequency ................................................................. 148

Burst Cycle/Burst Count .................................................... 149

Infinite Burst Count ............................................................ 151

Burst Period ........................................................................ 151

Burst Phase ........................................................................ 153

Burst Trigger Source .......................................................... 154

Burst Delay ......................................................................... 156

Gated Trigger Polarity ........................................................ 157

Gated Trigger Phase ........................................................... 157

91

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Amplitude Modulation (AM)

An AM waveform is produced from a carrier waveform and a modulating waveform. The amplitude of the modulated carrier waveform depends on the amplitude of the modulating waveform.

The AFG-30XX function generator can set the carrier frequency, amplitude and offset as well as internal or external modulation sources. When using the function generator, only one type of modulated waveform can be created at any one time for the selected channel.

Modulated Carrier

Waveform

Modulating waveform

92

Selecting AM Modulation

Panel Operation 1. Press the MOD key.

2. Press F1 (AM).

MODULATION

MOD

AM F 1

AM Carrier Shape

Background Sine, square, triangle, ramp, pulse, noise or arbitrary waveforms can be used as the carrier shape. The default waveform shape is set to sine.

Harmonic and DC are not available as a carrier shape. Before the carrier shape can be selected,

choose AM modulation mode, see page 36 or 95.

Select a Standard

Carrier Shape

1. Press the Waveform key.

2. Press F1~F5 to choose the carrier wave shape.

Waveform

Sine

F 1

~

Ramp

F 5

93

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Select an

Arbitrary

Waveform Carrier

Shape.

3. See the Arbitrary waveform quick guide or chapter to use an arbitrary waveform.

Page 44

Page 175

Range AM Carrier Shape sine, square, triangle, pulse, ramp, noise, arbitrary waveform

Carrier Frequency

The maximum carrier frequency depends on the carrier shape selected. The default carrier frequency for all carrier shapes is 1kHz.

Panel Operation 1. With a carrier waveform, press the FREQ/Rate key.

FREQ/Rate


Range

94

3. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the carrier frequency.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

4. Press F2~F6 to select the frequency range. uHz

F 2

~

MHz

F 6

Carrier Shape Carrier Frequency

Sine 1μHz~30MHz

(20MHz AFG-3021/3022)

Square

Triangle

Pulse

1μHz~30MHz

(20MHz AFG-3021/3022)

1μHz~1MHz

1μHz~25MHz

(20MHz AFG-3021/3022)

Ramp 1μHz~1MHz

Continued next page

Noise

ARB

N/A

125MHz to 1µHz

MODULATION

Modulating Wave Shape

The function generator can accept internal as well as external sources. The AFG-30XX has sine, square, triangle, up ramp and down ramp modulating waveform shapes. Sine waves are the default wave shape.

Panel Operation 1. Select MOD.

Note

MOD

2. Press F1 (AM).

AM

F 1

3. Press F4 (Shape).

Shape F 4

4. Press F1~F5 to select the waveform shape.

Square wave

Sine

F 1

50% Duty cycle

~

DnRamp

F 5

UpRamp

Triangle

DnRamp

100% Symmetry

50% Symmetry

0% Symmetry

95

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

AM Frequency

The frequency of the modulation waveform (AM Frequency) can be set from 2mHz to 20kHz.


MOD

2. Press F1 (AM).

AM

F 1

3. Press F3 (AM Freq).

AM Freq F 3

4. The AM Freq parameter will become highlighted in the Waveform display area.

Range

96

5. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the AM frequency.

1

0

7

4

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

6. Press F1~F3 to select the frequency range. mHz

F 1

Modulation frequency 2mHz~20kHz

Default frequency 100Hz

~ kHz

F 3

MODULATION

Modulation Depth

The modulation depth determines the maximum and minimum amplitude of the AM waveform. The modulation depth (as a percentage) is defined by the ratio of the modulating waveform voltage and the carrier waveform voltage multiplied by 100:

Modulation Depth



Modulating WaveVoltag e x 100

CarrrierWa veVoltage

The maximum and minimum peak to peak voltage of the modulated waveform can then be defined by:

V

V

max

 Vpp 

Vc



( 1



Depth

)

100 min



Vc



( 1



Depth

)

100

Below is a visual explanation of the relationship between the modulation signal, carrier signal and the resulting output signal.

Note: Vpp is the amplitude setting on the AFG.

Vm = Modulation Amplitude

Modulation

Signal

Vc = Carrier Amplitude

Carrier

Signal

Vm

Vmax = Vpp

Vc

Vmin

Output

Signal

97

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual


MOD

2. Press F1 (AM).

AM F 1

3. Press F2 (Depth).

Depth

4. The AM Depth parameter will become highlighted in the waveform display area.

F 2

Range

5. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the AM depth.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/


Depth

Default depth

0%~120%

100%

% F 1

98

MODULATION

Note When the modulation depth is greater than 100%, the output cannot exceed ±5VPeak (10k Ω load).

If an external modulation source is selected, modulation depth is limited to ± 5V from the MOD

INPUT terminal on the rear panel. For example, if modulation depth is set to 100%, then the maximum amplitude is +5V, and the minimum amplitude is -5V.

Selecting (AM) Modulation Source

The function generator will accept an internal or external source for

AM modulation. The default source is internal.


MOD

2. Press F1 (AM).

AM F 1

3. Press F1 (Source).

4. To select the source, press F1

(Internal) or F2 (External).

Source

INT

F 1

F 1

~

EXT

F 2

MOD

External Source Use the MOD INPUT terminal on the rear panel when using an external source.

42V

MAX

Note

For AFG-3022/3032, using the CH1 or CH2 MOD input depends on which channel is used for modulation.



99

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

100

MODULATION

Frequency Modulation (FM)

An FM waveform is produced from a carrier waveform and a modulating waveform. The instantaneous frequency of the carrier waveform varies with the magnitude of the modulating waveform.

When using the function generator, only one type of modulated waveform can be created at any one time for the selected channel.

Modulating waveform

Modulated Carrier

Waveform

101

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Selecting Frequency Modulation (FM)

When FM is selected, the modulated waveform depends on the carrier frequency, the output amplitude and offset voltage.


2. Press F2 (FM).

MOD

FM

F 2

FM Carrier Shape

Background The default carrier waveform shape is set to sine.

Sine, square, triangle or ramp waveforms can be used as the carrier shape. Noise, Pulse, ARB, DC and Harmonic waveforms cannot be used as a carrier wave.


Range

Waveform

2. Press F1~F5 to choose the carrier wave shape. (bar F4)

Carrier Shape

Sine

F 1

~

Ramp

F 5

Sine, Square, Triangle, Ramp.

102

MODULATION

FM Carrier Frequency

When using the AFG-30XX function generator, the carrier frequency must be equal to or greater than the frequency deviation. If the frequency deviation is set to a value greater than the carrier frequency, the deviation is set to the maximum allowed. The maximum frequency of the carrier wave depends on the waveform shape chosen.

Panel Operation 1. To select the carrier frequency, press the FREQ/

Rate key.

FREQ/Rate


Range


7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

4. Press F2~F6 to select the frequency unit. uHz

F 2

~

MHz

F 6


Sine 1μHz~30MHz

(20MHz AFG-3021/3022)

Square

Triangle

Ramp

Default frequency

1μHz~30MHz

(20MHz AFG-3021/3022)

1μHz~1MHz

1μHz~1MHz

1 kHz

103

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

FM Wave Shape

The function generator can accept internal as well as external sources. The AFG-30XX has sine, square, triangle, positive and negative ramps (UpRamp, DnRamp) as the internal modulating waveform shapes. Sine is the default wave shape.


Note

MOD

2. Press F2 (FM).

FM F 2


Shape

F 4


Square wave

Sine

F 1

50% Duty cycle

~

DnRamp

F 5

UpRamp 100% Symmetry

Triangle

DnRamp

50% Symmetry

0% Symmetry

104

MODULATION

Modulation Frequency

For frequency modulation, the function generator will accept internal or external sources.


MOD

2. Press F2 (FM).

FM

F 2

3. Press F3 (FM Freq).

FM Freq F 3

4. The FM Freq parameter will become highlighted in the waveform display panel.

Range

5. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the FM frequency.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

6. Press F1~F3 to select the frequency unit. mHz

F 1



~ kHz

F 3

105

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Frequency Deviation

The frequency deviation is the peak frequency deviation from the carrier wave and the modulated wave.


MOD

2. Press F2 (FM).

FM

F 2

3. Press F2 (Freq Dev).

Freq Dev F 2

4. The Freq Dev parameter will become highlighted in the waveform display panel.

5. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the frequency deviation.

6. Press F1~ F5 to choose the frequency units.

7

4

1

0 uHz

F 1

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

~

MHz

F 5

106

Range

MODULATION

Frequency

Deviation

DC~30MHz (20MHz AFG-

3021/3022)

DC~1MHz(Triangle)

Default deviation 100kHz

Selecting (FM) Modulation Source

The function generator will accept an internal or external source for

FM modulation. The default source is internal.


MOD

2. Press F2 (FM).

FM F 2


Source F 1



INT

F 1

~

EXT

F 2

MOD


42V

MAX


Note If an external modulating source is selected, the frequency deviation is limited to the ± 5V MOD

INPUT terminal on the rear panel. The frequency deviation is proportional to the signal level of the modulation in voltage. For example, if the modulation in voltage is +5V, then the frequency deviation would be equal to the set frequency deviation. Lower signal levels reduce the frequency deviation while negative voltage levels produce frequency deviations with frequencies

107

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual below the carrier waveform.

108

MODULATION

Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) Modulation

Frequency Shift Keying Modulation is used to shift the frequency output of the function generator between two preset frequencies

(carrier frequency, hop frequency). The frequency at which the carrier and hop frequency shift is determined by the internal rate generator or the voltage level from the Trigger INPUT terminal on the rear panel.

Only one modulation mode can be used at once for the selected channel. When FSK modulation is enabled, any other modulation modes will be disabled. Sweep and Burst also cannot be used with

FSK modulation. Enabling FSK will disable Sweep or Burst mode.

Carrier Frequency

Hop Frequency

109

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Selecting FSK Modulation

When using FSK mode, the output waveform uses the default settings for carrier frequency, amplitude and offset voltage.


2. Press F3 (FSK).

MOD

FSK

F 3

FSK Carrier Shape

Background Sine, square, triangle and ramp waveforms can be used as a carrier shape. The default carrier waveform shape is set to sine. Pulse, noise, harmonic, DC and ARB waveforms cannot be used as carrier waves.


Range

Waveform

2. Press F1~F5 to choose the carrier wave shape.

Carrier Shape

Sine

F 1

~

Ramp

F 5

Sine, Square, Triangle,

Ramp.

110

MODULATION

FSK Carrier Frequency

The maximum carrier frequency depends on the carrier shape. The default carrier frequency for all carrier shapes is 1kHz. The voltage level of the Trigger INPUT signal controls the output frequency when EXT is selected. When the Trigger INPUT signal is logically low the carrier frequency is output and when the signal is logically high, the hop frequency is output.


Rate key.

FREQ/Rate


Range


7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

4. Press F2~F6 to select the FSK frequency units. uHz

F 2


Sine

Square

1μHz~30MHz

(20MHz AFG-3021/3022)

1μHz~30MHz

(20MHz AFG-3021/3022)

~

MHz

F 6

Triangle

Ramp

1μHz~1MHz

1μHz~1MHz

111

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

FSK Hop Frequency

The default Hop frequency for all waveform shapes is 100 Hz. A square wave with a duty cycle of 50% is used for the internal modulation waveform. The voltage level of the Trigger INPUT signal controls the output frequency when EXT is selected. When the

Trigger INPUT signal is logically low the carrier frequency is output and when the signal is logically high, the hop frequency is output.


MOD

2. Press F3 (FSK).

FSK F 3

3. Press F2 (Hop Freq).

Hop Freq

F 2

4. The Hop Freq parameter will become highlighted in the Waveform Display area.

5. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the hop frequency.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

112

Range

MODULATION

6. Press F1~F5 to select the frequency range.

Waveform Carrier Frequency

Sine 1μHz~30MHz

(20MHz AFG-3021/3022)

Square 1μHz~30MHz

(20MHz AFG-3021/3022)

Triangle 1μHz~1MHz

Ramp 1μHz~1MHz uHz

F 1

~

MHz

F 5

FSK Rate

The FSK Rate function is used to determine the rate at which the output frequency changes between the carrier and hop frequencies.

The FSK Rate function only applies to internal FSK sources.


MOD

2. Press F3 (FSK).

FSK F 3

3. Press F3 (FSK Rate).

FSK Rate F 3

4. The FSK Rate parameter will become highlighted in the waveform display area.

113

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Range

Note

5. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the FSK rate.

7

4

1

8

5

2

9

6

3

0 /


F 1

~ kHz

F 4

FSK Rate

Default

2mHz~1MHz

10Hz

If an external source is selected, FSK Rate settings are ignored.

FSK Source

The AFG-30XX accepts internal and external FSK sources, with internal as the default source. When the FSK source is set to internal, the FSK rate is configured using the FSK Rate function. When an external source is selected the FSK rate is equal to the frequency of the Trigger INPUT signal on the rear panel.


MOD

2. Press F3 (FSK).

FSK F 3

114

Note

MODULATION


Source F 1



INT

F 1

Note that the Trigger INPUT terminal cannot configure edge polarity.

~

EXT

F 2

115

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Phase Modulation (PM)

A PM waveform is produced from a carrier waveform and a modulating waveform. The phase of the carrier waveform is modulated by the magnitude of the modulating waveform. When using the function generator, only one type of modulated waveform can be created at any one time for the selected channel.

Modulating waveform

Modulated Carrier

Waveform

116

MODULATION

Selecting Phase Modulation (PM)

When PM is selected, the modulated waveform depends on the carrier frequency, the output amplitude and offset voltage.


2. Press F4 (PM).

MOD

PM F 4

PM Carrier Shape

Background The default waveform shape is set to sine. Sine, square, triangle or ramp waveforms can be used as the carrier shape. Noise, Pulse, ARB, DC and

Harmonic waveforms cannot be used as a carrier wave.


Range

Waveform


Carrier Shape

Sine

F 1

~

Ramp

F 5

Sine, Square, Triangle, Ramp.

117

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

PM Carrier Frequency



Rate key.

FREQ/Rate


Range


7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/


F 2

~

MHz

F 6


Sine

Square

Triangle

Ramp

Default frequency

1μHz~30MHz

(20MHz AFG-3021/3022)

1μHz~30MHz

(20MHz AFG-3021/3022)

1μHz~1MHz

1μHz~1MHz

1 kHz

118

MODULATION

PM Wave Shape

The AFG-30XX has sine, square, triangle, positive and negative ramps (UpRamp, DnRamp) as the internal modulating waveform shapes. Sine is the default wave shape.


Note

MOD

2. Press F4 (PM).

PM F 4


Shape F 4


Square wave

Sine

F 1

50% Duty cycle

~

DnRamp

F 5

UpRamp

Triangle

DnRamp

100% Symmetry

50% Symmetry

0% Symmetry

119

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Modulation Frequency

The PM Freq parameter sets the modulation frequency for the phase modulation function when using an internal source.


MOD

2. Press F4 (PM).

PM F 4

3. Press F3 (PM Freq).

PM Freq F 3

4. The PM Freq parameter will become highlighted in the waveform display panel.

Range

120

5. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the PM frequency.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/


F 1



~ kHz

F 3

MODULATION

Phase Modulation Deviation

The phase modulation deviation is the peak phase deviation of the modulating wave from the carrier wave.


MOD

2. Press F4 (PM).

PM F 4

3. Press F2 (Phase Dev).

Phase Dev F 2

4. The PM Dev parameter will become highlighted in the waveform display panel.

Range

5. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the phase deviation.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

6. Press F1 to choose the degree units.

PM Deviation

Default

0~360 degrees

180 degrees

Degree F 1

121

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

SUM Modulation

SUM modulation adds the modulating waveform to the carrier waveform. The amplitude of the modulating waveform is set as a percentage of the carrier amplitude.

Only one mode of modulation can be enabled at any one time for the selected channel. If SUM is enabled, any other modulation mode will be disabled. Likewise, burst and sweep modes cannot be used with SUM modulation and will be disabled when SUM is enabled.

SUM Modulated waveform

SUM Freq

(modulation frequency)

122

MODULATION

Selecting SUM Modulation

When selecting SUM, the carrier frequency, amplitude and frequency must be considered.


2. Press F5 (SUM).

MOD

SUM F 5

SUM Carrier Shape

Background The default carrier waveform shape is set to sine.

The carrier can be set to Sine, Triangle, Pulse,

Noise or Ramp. ARB, DC and Harmonic waveforms cannot be used as a carrier wave.


Range

Waveform


Carrier Shape

Sine

F 1

~

Ramp

F 5

Sine, Triangle, Pulse, Ramp,

Noise.

123

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

SUM Carrier Frequency



Rate key.

FREQ/Rate


Range


7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/


F 2

~

MHz

F 6


Sine

Triangle

Ramp

Default frequency

1μHz~30MHz

(20MHz AFG-3021/3022)

1μHz~1MHz

1μHz~1MHz

1 kHz

SUM Modulating Wave Shape

The modulating wave shapes for internal sources include sine, square, triangle, up ramp and down ramp. The default wave shape is sine.


MOD

124

Range

MODULATION

2. Press F5 (SUM).

SUM F 5


Shape F 4

4. Press F1~F5 to select a waveform shape.

Waveform

Square

UpRamp

Sine

F 1

50% Duty cycle

100% Symmetry

~

DnRamp

F 5

Triangle

DnRamp

50% Symmetry

0% Symmetry

SUM Frequency

The SUM Frequency sets the frequency of the modulating waveform.


MOD

2. Press F5 (SUM).

SUM

F 5

3. Press F3 (SUM Freq).

SUM Freq F 3

125

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

4. The SUM Freq parameter will become highlighted in the Waveform Display area.

Range

5. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the SUM frequency.

6. Press F1~F3 to select the frequency unit range.

SUM Frequency

Default

7

4

1

0 mHz

F 1

8

5

2

9

6

2mHz~20kHz

20kHz

3

/

~ kHz

F 3

SUM Amplitude

The SUM amplitude parameter sets the amplitude of the modulating waveform as a percentage of the carrier amplitude.


MOD

2. Press F5 (SUM).

SUM

F 5

3. Press F2 (SUM Ampl).

SUM Ampl F 2

126

MODULATION

4. The SUM Amplitude will become highlighted in the waveform display area.

Range

5. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the SUM amplitude.

1

0

7

4

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

6. Press F1 (%) to select percentage units.

SUM amplitude

Default

0% ~ 100%

50%

% F 1

SUM Source

The AFG-30XX accepts internal and external modulation sources.

Internal is the default source for SUM modulation sources.


MOD

2. Press F5 (SUM).

SUM F 5


Source F 1

127

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual



INT

F 1

~

EXT

F 2

MOD


42V

MAX


Note If an external modulation source is selected, the SUM amplitude is controlled by the ± 5V from the MOD

INPUT terminal on the rear panel. For example, if

SUM modulation is set to 100%, then the amplitude occurs at +5V, and the minimum amplitude at -5V.

128

MODULATION

Pulse Width Modulation

For pulse width modulation the instantaneous voltage of the modulating waveform determines the width of the pulse waveform.

Only one mode of modulation can be enabled at any one time for the selected channel. If PWM is enabled, any other modulation mode will be disabled. Likewise, burst and sweep modes cannot be used with PWM and will be disabled when PWM is enabled.

PWM

129

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Selecting Pulse Width Modulation

When selecting PWM, the current setting of the carrier frequency, the amplitude modulation frequency, output, and offset voltage must be considered.


Waveform

2. Press F2 (Square).

Square F 2

3. Press the MOD key.

MOD

4. Press F6 (PWM).

PWM F 6

PWM Carrier Shape

PWM uses a square wave as the carrier shape. Other wave shapes cannot be used with PWM. If a carrier shape other than square is used with PWM, an error message will appear.

130

MODULATION

PWM Carrier Frequency

The carrier frequency depends on the square wave. The default carrier frequency is 1kHz.


Rate key.

FREQ/Rate


Range


7

4

1

0

4. Press F2~F6 to select the

PWM frequency unit. uHz

F 2

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

~

MHz

F 6

Frequency 1μHz~1.5MHz

PWM Modulating Wave Shape

The modulating wave shapes for internal sources include sine, square, triangle, up ramp and down ramp. The default wave shape is sine.


MOD

2. Press F6 (PWM).

PWM F 6


Shape F 4

131

Range

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

4. Press F1~F5 to select a waveform shape.

Waveform

Square

UpRamp

Sine

F 1

50% Duty cycle

100% Symmetry

~

DnRamp

F 5

Triangle

DnRamp

50% Symmetry

0% Symmetry

Modulating Waveform Frequency


MOD

2. Press F6 (PWM).

PWM F 6

3. Press F3 (PWM Frequency).

PWM Freq

F 3

4. The PWM Freq parameter will become highlighted in the Waveform Display area.

132

MODULATION

Range

5. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the PWM frequency.

7

4

1

0

6. Press F1~F3 to select the frequency unit range.

PWM Frequency

Default mHz

F 1

8

5

2

9

6

2mHz~20kHz

20kHz

3

/

~ kHz

F 3

Modulation Duty Cycle

Duty function is used to set the duty cycle as percentage.


MOD

2. Press F6 (PWM).

PWM F 6

3. Press F2 (Duty).

Duty F 2

4. The Duty parameter will become highlighted in the waveform display area.

133

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Range

Note

5. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the Duty cycle.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

6. Press F1 (%) to select percentage units.

% F 1

Duty cycle

Default

0% ~ 100%

50%

Pulse waveforms can be modulated with an external source using the external source function. When using an external source, the pulse width is controlled by the

± 5V MOD INPUT terminal.

PWM Source

The AFG-30XX accepts internal and external PWM sources. Internal is the default source for PWM sources.


MOD

2. Press F6 (PWM).

PWM F 6


Source F 1

134

MODULATION



INT

F 1

~

EXT

F 2

MOD


42V

MAX


Note If an external modulation source is selected, pulse width modulation is controlled by the ± 5V from the

MOD INPUT terminal on the rear panel. For example, if duty is set to 100%, then the maximum pulse width occurs at +5V, and the minimum pulse width at -5V.

135

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Sweep

The function generator can perform frequency sweeps for sine, square, ramp and triangle waveforms or amplitude sweeps for sine, square, triangle, pulse, ramp, noise and ARB waveforms. When

Sweep mode is enabled, Burst or any other modulation modes will be disabled for the selected channel. When sweep is enabled, burst mode is automatically disabled.

When the sweep type is set to frequency, the function generator will sweep from a start frequency to a stop frequency over a number of designated steps.

When the sweep type is set to amplitude, the function generator will sweep from a start amplitude to a stop amplitude over a set sweep time.

If manual or external sources are used, the function generator can be used to output a single sweep. The step spacing of the sweep can be linear or logarithmic. The function generator can also sweep up or sweep down in frequency or amplitude. Frequency Sweep and

Amplitude Sweep cannot be used at the same time.

Frequency Sweep

Amplitude Sweep

136

MODULATION

Selecting Sweep Mode

The Sweep button is used to output a sweep. If no settings have been configured, the default settings for output amplitude, offset and frequency are used.

Sweep

Sweep Type

Sweep type is used to select between whether a frequency or amplitude sweep is performed.

Panel Operation 1. Press the Sweep key.

Sweep

2. Press F2 (Type/MOD).

3. Press F1 (Type).

4. To select frequency or amplitude sweep, press F1

(Frequency) or F2 (Amptd).

Type/MOD F 2

Type F 1

Frequency

F 1

~

Amptd

F 2

Example Frequency Amplitude

137

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Setting Start and Stop Frequency/Amplitude

The start and stop frequencies/amplitudes define the upper and lower sweep limits. The function generator will sweep from the start through to the stop frequency/amplitude and cycle back to the start frequency/amplitude. The sweep is phase continuous over the full sweep frequency range (100μHz-30MHz). For amplitude sweep mode, the amplitude ranges from 1mVpp-10Vpp.

Panel Operation 1. Press the SWEEP key.

2. To select the start or stop frequency/amplitude, press

F3 (Start) or F4 (Stop).

Start

F 3

Sweep

~

F 4

3. The Start or Stop parameter will become highlighted in the waveform display area.

Start

(Frequency shown)

Stop

(Amplitude shown)

4. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the Stop/Start frequency/amplitude.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

138

Range

(Frequency)

Range

(Amplitude)

Note

MODULATION


Start/Stop frequency units or amplitude units.

Sweep Range uHz

F 1

~

(20MHz AFG-3021/3022)

MHz

F 5

1μHz~30MHz (Sine/Square)

Start - Default

Stop - Default

Sweep Range

1μHz~1MHz (Ramp/Triangle)

100Hz

1kHz

1mVpp~10Vpp (into 50Ω)

Start - Default

Stop - Default

1Vpp

3Vpp

To sweep from low to high frequencies or amplitudes, set the start frequency/amplitude less than the stop frequency/amplitude.

To sweep from high to low frequencies or amplitude, set the start frequency/amplitude greater than the stop frequency/amplitude.

Center Frequency and Span

A center frequency and span can be set to determine the upper and lower sweep limits (start/stop). This setting is only available when

Sweep Type = Frequency.


Sweep

2. Press F6 (More).

More F 6

3. To select span or center, press

F1 (Span) or F2 (Center).

Span

F 1

~

Center

F 2

139

Span

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

4. The Span or Center parameter will become highlighted in the Waveform Display area.

Center

Range

Note

5. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the Span/Center frequency.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/


Start/Stop frequency units.

Center

Frequencies uHz

F 1

~

MHz

F 5

1μHz~30MHz (Sine/Square)

(20MHz AFG-3021/3022)

1μHz~1MHz (Triangle/Ramp)

Span Frequency DC~30MHz (Sine/Square)

(20MHz AFG-3021/3022)

DC ~1MHz (Triangle/Ramp)

Center - Default 550Hz

Span – Default 900Hz

To sweep from low to high frequencies, set a positive span.

To sweep from high to low frequencies, set a negative span.

140

MODULATION

Sweep Mode

Sweep mode is used to select between continuous or gated sweeps.

When set to continuous mode, the sweep function will be continuously output, according to the internal trigger. When set to gated mode the sweep output will be synchronized to the trigger input.


Sweep


Type/MOD F 2

3. Press F2 (Mode).

4. To select Cont or Gated, press

F1 (Cont) or F2 (Gated).

Cont

F 1

Mode F 2

~

Gated

F 2

Sweep Function

Sweep function is used to select between linear or logarithmic sweeping. Linear sweeping is the default setting.



Sweep

Type/MOD F 2

141

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

3. Press F3 (Function).

4. To select linear or logarithmic sweep, press F1 (Linear) or F2

(Log).

Function

Linear

F 1

F 3

~

Log

F 2

Sweep Waveform Type

The sweep waveform type sets the shape of the sweep waveform that is created.

The sawtooth waveform creates a swept waveform in the shape of a sawtooth wave:

The triangle waveform creates a waveform in the shape of a shuttlecock:



Sweep

Type/MOD F 2

142

3. To select waveform type, press F4 (Sawtooth) or F5

(Triangle).

MODULATION

Sawtooth

F 4

~

Triangle

F 5

Sweep Time

The sweep time is used to determine how long it takes to perform a sweep from the start to stop frequencies/amplitude. The function generator automatically determines the number of discrete frequencies or the amplitude used in the sweep depending on the duration of the sweep.


Sweep

2. Press F5 (SWP Time).

SWP Time

F 5

3. The Sweep Time parameter will become highlighted in the Waveform display area.

143

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Range

4. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the Sweep time.

5. Press F1~F2 to select the time unit.

Sweep time

Default

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6 mSEC

F 1

3

/

~

SEC

F 2

1ms ~ 500s

1s

144

MODULATION

Sweep Trigger Source

In sweep mode the function generator will sweep each time a trigger signal is received. After a sweep output has completed, the function generator outputs the start frequency and waits for a trigger signal before completing the sweep. The trigger source can either be an internal (settable trigger interval) trigger, a manual trigger or an external trigger. The default trigger source is internal.


Sweep

2. Press F1 (TRIG Type).


(INT), F2 (EXT) or F3

(Manual).

TRIG Type

INT

F 1

F 1

~

Manual

F 3

Internal Trigger 1. If INT (internal trigger) was selected, press F5 (TRIG

Time) to set the timing interval for the internal trigger.

TRIG Time

2. TRIG Time will become highlighted in the waveform display area.

F 5

3. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the trigger interval time.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

145

146

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

4. Press F1~F2 to choose the time unit. mSEC

F 1

Internal Trigger Interval 1ms ~ 500s

~

SEC

F 2

Range

Manual Trigger 5. If Manual was selected, press

F1 (Trigger) to manually start each sweep.

Trigger

Note

F 1

6. Press F6 (Return) to return to the menu.

Return F 6

Using the Internal source will produce a continuous sweep at an interval according to the trigger time settings.

With an external source, a sweep is output each time a trigger pulse (TTL) is received from the

Trigger INPUT terminal on the rear panel.

The trigger period must be equal to or greater than the sweep time plus 1ms.

MODULATION

Burst Mode

The function generator can create a waveform burst with a designated number of cycles. Burst mode supports sine, square, triangle, pulse, ramp, noise (gated burst mode only) waveforms*.

Burst

*The ARB function also has an N-Cycle Burst mode, however it is not accessible from the Burst function mode.

Selecting Burst Mode

When burst mode is selected, any modulation or sweep modes will be automatically disabled for the selected channel. If no settings have been configured, the default settings for output amplitude, offset and frequency are used.

Burst

Burst Modes

Burst mode can be configured using Triggered (N Cycle mode) or

Gated mode. Using N Cycle/Triggered mode, each time the function generator receives a trigger, the function generator will output a specified number of waveform cycles (burst). After the burst, the function generator will wait for the next trigger before outputting another burst. N Cycle is the default Burst mode. Triggered mode can use internal or external triggers.

The alternative to using a specified number of cycles, Gate mode, uses the external trigger to turn on or off the output. When the

Trigger INPUT signal is high, waveforms are continuously output.

147

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

When the Trigger INPUT signal goes low, the waveforms will stop being output after the last waveform completes its period. The voltage level of the output will remain equal to the starting phase of the burst waveforms, ready for the signal to go high again.

Burst Mode Burst Count Burst Period Phase

Triggered (Int) Available Available Available

Trigger

Source

Immediate

Triggered (Ext) Available

Gated pulse (Ext) Unused

Unused

Unused

Available

Available

EXT

Unused

In Gated mode, burst count, burst cycle and trigger source are ignored. If a trigger is input, then the trigger will be ignored and will not generate any errors.

Panel Operation 1. Press the Burst key.

2. Select either N Cycle (F1) or

Gate (F2).

N Cycle

F 1

Burst

~

Gate

F 2

Burst Frequency

In the N Cycle and Gated modes, the waveform frequency sets the repetition rate of the burst waveforms. In N-Cycle mode, the burst is output at the waveform frequency for the number of cycles set. In

Gated mode the waveform frequency is output while the trigger is high. Burst mode supports sine, square, triangle or ramp waveforms.

Panel Operation 1. Press the FREQ/Rate key.

FREQ/Rate


148

MODULATION

Range

Note

3. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the frequency.

7

4

1

8

5

2

9

6

3

0 /

4. Press F2~F6 to choose the frequency unit.

Frequency uHz

F 2

~

MHz

F 6

1uHz~30MHz

(20MHz AFG-3021/3022)

Frequency – Ramp 1uHz~1MHz

Default 1kHz

Waveform frequency and burst period are not the same. The burst period is the time between the bursts in N-Cycle mode.

Burst Cycle/Burst Count

The burst cycle (burst count) is used to define the number of cycles that are output for a burst waveform. Burst cycle is only used with

N-cycle mode (internal, external or manual source). The default burst cycle is 1.


Burst

2. Press F1 (N Cycle).

N Cycle F 1

3. Press F1 (Cycles).

Cycles F 1

4. The Cycles parameter will become highlighted in the Waveform Display area.

149

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Range

Note

5. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the number of cycles.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

6. Press F5 to select the Cyc unit.

Cyc F 5

Cycles 1~1,000,000

Burst cycles are continuously output when the internal trigger is selected. The burst period determines the rate of bursts and the time between bursts.

Burst cycle must be less than the product of the burst period and wave frequency.

Burst Cycle < (Burst Period x Wave Frequency)

If gated burst mode is selected, burst cycle is ignored. Though, if the burst cycle is changed remotely whilst in gated mode, the new burst cycle is remembered when used next.

150

MODULATION

Infinite Burst Count


Note

Burst


N Cycle F 1

3. Press F2 (Infinite).

Infinite F 2

Infinite burst in only available when using manual triggering.

Above 25MHz, Infinite burst is only available with square and sine waveforms.

Burst Period

The burst period is used to determine the time between the start of one burst and the start of the next burst. It is only used for internally triggered bursts.


Burst


N Cycle F 1

151

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

3. Press F4 (Period).

Period

F 4

4. The Period parameter will become highlighted in the Waveform Display area.

Range

Note

5. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter period time.

7

4

1

8

5

2

9

6

3

6. Press F1~F3 to choose the period time unit.

0 uSEC

F 1

/

~

SEC

F 3

Period time

Default

1us~500s

10ms

Burst period is only applicable for internal triggers.

Burst period settings are ignored when using gated burst mode or for external and manual triggers.

The burst period must be large enough to satisfied the condition below:

Burst Period>Burst Count/Wave frequency + 200ns.

152

MODULATION

Burst Phase

Burst Phase defines the starting phase of the burst waveform. The default is 0 ˚.


Burst


N Cycle F 1


Phase

F 3

4. The Phase parameter will become highlighted in the Waveform Display area.

Range

5. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the phase.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

6. Press F5 (Degree) to select the phase unit.

Phase

Degree

-360 ˚~+360˚

F 5

Default

0 ˚

153

Note

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

When using sine, square, triangle or ramp waveforms, 0 ˚ is the point where the waveforms are at zero volts.

0˚ is the starting point of a waveform. For sine, square or Triangle, Ramp waveforms, 0˚ is at 0 volts (assuming there is no DC offset).

Burst Phase is used for both N cycle and Gated burst modes. In gated burst mode, when the

Trigger INPUT signal goes low the output is stopped after the current waveform is finished.

The voltage output level will remain equal to the voltage at the starting burst phase.

When using square waves in burst mode, the duty cycle in the first and last period may have some errors under specific phase settings due to the frequency response.

Burst Trigger Source

Each time the function generator receives a trigger in triggered burst

(N-Cycle) mode, a waveform burst is output. The number of waveforms in each burst is designated by the burst cycle (burst count). When a burst has completed, the function generator waits for the next trigger. Internal source is the default triggered burst (Ncycle) mode on power up.


Burst


N Cycle F 1

3. Press F5 (TRIG setup).

TRIG setup F 5

154

Manual

Triggering

MODULATION

4. Choose a trigger type by pressing F1 (INT), F2 (EXT) or F3 (Manual).

5. If a manual source is selected, the trigger soft-key (F1) must be pressed each time to output a burst.

INT

F 1

~

Manual

F 3

F 1

Note When the internal trigger source is chosen, the burst is output continuously at a rate defined by the burst period setting. The interval between bursts is defined by the burst period.

When the external trigger is selected the function generator will receive a trigger signal (TTL) from the Trigger INPUT terminal on the rear panel.

Each time the trigger is received, a burst is output

(with the defined number of cycles). If a trigger signal is received during a burst, it is ignored.

When using the manual or external trigger only the burst phase and burst cycle/count are applicable, the burst period is not used.

A time delay can be inserted after each trigger, before the start of a burst.

155

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Burst Delay


Burst


N Cycle F 1

3. Press F5 (TRIG setup).

TRIG setup F 5

4. Press F4 (Delay).

Delay F 4

5. The Delay parameter will become highlighted in the Waveform Display area.

Range

156

6. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the delay time.

7

4

1

0

7. Press F1~F4 to choose the delay time unit.

Delay time

Default

0s~100s

0s nSEC

F 1

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

~

SEC

F 4

MODULATION

Gated Trigger Polarity

The Polarity setting sets the polarity of the input trigger signal for the gated mode.


Burst

2. Press F2 (Gate).

Gate F 2

3. Press F1 (Polarity).

4. Select either Pos (F1) or

Neg (F2).

Polarity

F 1

F 1

N Cycle

~

Gate

F 2

Gated Trigger Phase

The phase setting for gated burst mode sets the starting phase of the outputted burst waveform.


Burst

2. Press F2 (Gate).

Gate F 2


Phase F 2

4. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the phase.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

5. Press F5 (Degree) to select the phase unit.

Degree

F 5

157

Range Phase

Default

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

-360

0 ˚

˚~+360˚

158

SECONDARY SYSTEM FUNCTION SETTINGS

S

ECONDARY SYSTEM

FUNCTION SETTINGS

The secondary system functions are used to store and recall settings, set the LAN/USB/GPIB settings, view the software version, update the firmware, perform self calibration, set the interface type, change the language, set the output impedance, configure DSO link and other miscellaneous functions.

Save, Recall or Delete ...................................................... 160

Selecting the Remote Interface ........................................ 164

GPIB Interface .................................................................... 164

LAN Interface ..................................................................... 165

LAN Host Name ................................................................. 167

USB Interface...................................................................... 168

System and Settings ........................................................ 169

Viewing and Updating the Software & Firmware Version . 169

Language Selection ............................................................ 170

Setting the Beeper Sound .................................................. 171

Display Suspend ................................................................. 172

Display Brightness ............................................................. 172

Reference Clock Sources .................................................... 173

Setting the output impedance - AFG-3021/3031 ............... 175

DSO Link - AFG-3021/3031................................................ 176

159

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Save, Recall or Delete

The AFG-3021, AFG-3022, AFG-3031 & AFG-3032 have non-volatile memory to store instrument state and ARB data. There are 10 memory files numbered 0~9. Each memory file can either store arbitrary waveform data (ARB), settings or both. When data (ARB or

Setting data) is stored in a memory file, the data will be shown in red. If a file has no data, it will be shown in blue.

Save/Recall properties

ARB









Rate

Frequency

Length

Display horizontal



Setting

Functions

 Waveform

 Frequency







Pulse Width

Pulse rise time

Pulse fall time





















Square wave Duty

Ramp Symmetry

Amplitude

Amplitude unit

DC offset(DC waveform only)

Offset

Modulation type

Beep setting

Impedance

Main output





 Display vertical

Output Start

Output length









FM

 Source

 Shape





Deviation

FM frequency

FSK









Source

Shape

Rate

Hop frequency

PM

 Shape







Phase deviation

PM frequency

SUM

 Source

Shape

160









Harmonic order settings

 Harmonic display

Sweep

Source











Type

Time

Start frequency

Stop frequency

Center frequency











Span frequency

Start amplitude

Stop amplitude

AM

 Source

 Shape

Depth

AM frequency






Other

Interface

Display

Panel Operation 1. Press the UTIL key.









SUM amplitude

 SUM frequency

PWM

Source







Shape

Duty

Frequency

Burst Type

 Source

 Type









Cycles

Phase

Period

Delay





Phase

Dual channel settings

UTIL

2. Press F1 (Memory).

Memory F 1

161

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

3. Use the scroll wheel to highlight a memory file

(Memory0 ~ Memory9).

4. Choose a file operation to perform on the memory location:

Store

Recall

Press F1 to store a file, press

F2 to recall a file, or press F3 to delete a file.

Delete

5. Use the scroll wheel to now select the data type to save/recall/delete.

(ARB, Setting, ARB+Setting)

F 1

F 2

F 3

162


Range

Delete All

6. Press F5 (Done) to complete the operation.

Memory file

Data type

Done

F 5

Memory0 ~ Memory9

ARB, Setting, ARB+Setting

7. To delete all the files for

Memory0~Memory9, press

F4.

8. Press F1 (Done) to confirm the deletion of all files.

Delete All

Done

F 4

F 1

163

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Selecting the Remote Interface

The AFG-3021, AFG-3022, AFG-3031 & AFG-3032 has LAN, GPIB and USB interfaces for remote control. Only one remote interface can be used at any one time.

GPIB Interface

Background When using the GPIB interface, a GPIB address must be specified. The default GPIB interface is 10.


UTIL

2. Press F2 (Interface).

Interface F 2

3. Press F1 (GPIB).

GPIB F 1

4. Press F1 (Address)

Address F 1

5. GPIB will become highlighted.

164


Range

6. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the GPIB address.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

7. Press F5 (Done) to confirm the GPIB address.

GPIB address

Done

1~30

F 5

LAN Interface

Background When using the LAN interface, an IP must be specified (DHCP, Auto IP or manually configured).


UTIL


Interface F 2

3. Press F3 (LAN).

LAN F 3

4. Press F2 (Config).

5. Choose how to configure the

IP address. Press F1 (DHCP),

F2 (Auto IP) or F3 (Manual).

Config

DHCP

F 1

F 2

~

Manual

F 3

165

Range

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

DHCP

Auto IP

Manual

Use DHCP to automatically configure the IP address of the unit for networks with a DHCP server.

Use Auto IP to automatically configure the IP address of the unit when it is directly connected to a host PC via an

Ethernet cable.

Manually configure the IP address.

6. If Manual was selected, set F1

(IP Addr), F2 (NetMask) and

F3 (Gateway) in turn.

IP Addr

F 1

~

Gateway

F 3

7. The IP address, net mask or gateway settings become highlighted in the parameter window.

166

8. Use the number pad to enter the IP address, Net mask or gateway. Use the decimal point as a field separator.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

9. Press F5 (Done) to confirm the settings.

Done F 5


10. Finally, press F5 (Done) to confirm all the IP configuration settings.

Done F 5

LAN Host Name

Background The following describes how to set the host name for the unit when used in the LAN interface.


UTIL


Interface F 2

3. Press F3 (LAN).

LAN F 3

4. Press F2 (Config).

Config

F 2

5. Press F4 (HostName) to set the host name for the unit.

HostName

F 4

6. The Host Name settings become highlighted in the parameter window.

167

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

7. Use the scroll wheel to scroll through each character.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

8. Press F1 (Enter Char) to select a character and continue to the next character.

Done F 5

9. Press F5 (Done) to confirm the host name.

Done F 5

USB Interface

Background The following shows how to configure the meter for remote control via the USB interface.


UTIL


Interface F 2

3. Press F2 (USB).

USB F 2

168


System and Settings

There are a number of miscellaneous settings such as language options, display options, clock source as well as software and firmware settings that can be configured.

Note: The location of the “System” soft-key is different for the single and dual channel models. On the AFG-3021/3031, the “System” softkey is mapped to F4, rather than F5, as on the AFG-3022/3032.

Viewing and Updating the Software & Firmware Version


UTIL

2. Press F3 (Cal.).

Cal.

F 3

3. Press F2 (Software).

Software F 2

View Version

The version information will be shown on screen:

Instrument, Version, FPGA Revision, Bootload version, Serial number.

Update Software

& Firmware

5. To update the software & firmware, insert a USB flash drive with the software/firmware file in the

USB host drive. Press F2

(Upgrade).

Upgrade F 2

Note

4. To view the software and firmware version, press

F1(Version)

Version

The software/firmware uses a .bin extension

(format: AFG***.bin).

F 1

169

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Language Selection

Background The AFG-3021, AFG-3022, AFG-3031 and AFG-

3032 can be operated in English, Traditional or

Simplified Chinese. By default, the language is set to English.


UTIL

2. Press F4 (System) [F5 for

AFG-3021/3031].

3. Press F1 (Language).

System

Language

F 4

4. The Language parameter will become highlighted.

F 1

170


5. Select F1(Simplified Chinese),

F2(English) or F3(Traditional

Chinese) to choose the language.

簡體中文

F 1

~

繁體中文

F 3

Setting the Beeper Sound

Background The beeper sound can be set on or off for when a key is pressed or the scroll wheel is turned.


UTIL

2. Press F4 (System) [F5 for

AFG-3021/3031].

System F 4

3. Press F4 (Beep) to toggle the beeper on or off.

Beep F 4

4. The Beep parameter will become highlighted.

171

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Display Suspend

Background This function will turn off the display until a front panel key is pressed. When a panel key is pressed the display will turn back on.


UTIL

2. Press F4 (System)[F5 for

AFG-3021/3031].

System F 4

3. Press F2 (Display Opt).

Display Opt F 2

4. Press F1 (Display).

Display F 1

5. Select F1(Suspend) or F2(ON) to turn the display suspend feature on or off.

Suspend

F 1

~

ON

F 2

Display Brightness

Background The brightness of the display can be set from the utility-system menu.

172



Range

UTIL


AFG-3021/3031].

3. Press F2 (Display Opt).

System F 4

4. Press F2 (Brightness).

Display Opt

Brightness

F 2

F 2

Use the scroll wheel to set the brightness of the display.

Brightness 1 (dim) ~ 10 (bright)

Enter F 1

5. Press F1 (Enter) to finish setting the brightness.

Reference Clock Sources

Background An external 10MHz reference signal can be used to replace the internal 10MHz clock signal. An external reference clock can be used to increase the accuracy or stability of the clock signal. It can also be used to sync different units together so that they

operate on a synchronized clock. See page 187 for

multi-unit syncing details.

The reference input is isolated from the chassis ground, with an isolation voltage of 42Vpk. This will prevent ground loops and other related interference.

The REF OUT port provides a sync signal of the internal reference clock. This port can be used to

173

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual synchronize other equipment to the internal reference clock of the function generator. See page

187 for details on multi-unit syncing.

Connection

OUT

GPIB

WARNING

To avoid electric shock the power cord protective grounding conductor




MOD

INPUT

Trigger

IN

42V

MAX

LAN 10MHz REF input

10MHz Reference

Output

Specifications

Item

Output Voltage

Specification

1Vp-p/50Ω square wave

Output Impedance 50Ω, AC coupled

Output Frequency 10MHz

10MHz Reference

Input

Specifications

Item

Input Voltage

Input Impedance

Specification

0.5Vp-p to 5Vp-p

1kΩ, unbalanced, AC coupled

Max. Allowed Input ± 10Vdc

Input Frequency 10MHz ±10Hz

Waveform

Ground Isolation

Sine or square (50±5% duty)

42Vpk max.


UTIL


AFG-3021/3031].

3. Press F3 (Clk Source).

System F 4

4. Select F1(INT) or F2(EXT) to choose the clock source.

Clk Source

INT

F 1

F 3

~

EXT

F 2

174


FUSE RATING

AC 250V

T 1A

AC 100 240V

50 60Hz 85VA

Range


INT

EXT

Sets the internal clock as the reference clock.

Sets an external 10MHz signal as the reference clock.

5. If F2(EXT) was selected as the clock source, Press F3(EXT

Sync) to synchronize the unit to the external reference signal.

Clk Source F 3

Setting the output impedance - AFG-3021/3031

Background The AFG-3021/3031 has selectable output impedances: 50Ω or high impedance. The default output impedance is 50Ω. The output impedances are to be used as a reference only. If the actual load impedance is different to that specified, then the actual amplitude and offset will vary accordingly.

Note The following describes how to set the output impedance on the AFG-3021 and the AFG-3031. To set the output impedance on the AFG-3022 or

AFG-3032, please see page 180.


UTIL

2. Press F4 (Load).

3. Select F1 (50 OHM) or F2

(High Z) to select the output impedance.

Load

F 1

F 4

50 OHM

~

High Z

F 2

175

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

DSO Link - AFG-3021/3031

Background DSO Link enables the AFG-3021/3031 to receive lossless data from a GDS-2000 Series DSO to create

ARB data for the selected channel.

Note All models support the DSO Link function.

However the menu tree operation varies between the single and dual channel models. The procedure here is only applicable to the AFG-3021/3031. For

the AFG-3022 and AFG-3032, please see page 181.

Panel Operation 1. Connect the AFG-3021/3031’s

USB host port to the GDS-

2000’s USB B device port.

2. Press the CH1 or CH2 key.

UTIL

3. Press F6 (DSO Link).

DSO Link F 6

4. Press F1 (Search).

5. To select the DSO channel, press F1 (CH1), F3 (CH2), F4

(CH3) or F5 (CH4). The acquired data can then be displayed.

Search F 1

CH1

F 1

~

CH4

F 4

176


6. After a few moments the AFG-3021/3031 will automatically switch over to the ARB function and the waveform that was saved from the

DSO will be plotted as an ARB waveform.

See the ARB chapter to edit or save the resultant waveform.

177

178

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

D

UAL CHANNEL &

MULTI-UNIT OPERATION

The dual channel section details how to operate the unit in dual channel mode (AFG-3022 & AFG-3032 only) and how to set any channel-specific settings. The multi-unit section describes how to sync multiple units together in a master-slave configuration.

Dual Channel Settings ..................................................... 179

Channel Phase Settings ..................................................... 179

Setting the output impedance ........................................... 180

DSO Link ............................................................................ 181

Frequency Coupling ........................................................... 182

Amplitude Coupling ........................................................... 184

Channel Tracking ............................................................... 185

Multi-Unit Syncing .......................................................... 187

Multi Unit Connection ....................................................... 187

Multi Unit Setup ................................................................ 189

DUAL CHANNEL & MULTI-UNIT OPERATION

Dual Channel Settings

There are a number of settings that only apply to the AFG-3022 and

AFG-3032, such a channel tracking, DSO link, output impedance settings and channel phase settings for each channel.

Channel Phase Settings

Background The phase settings allow you to configure the start phase of a channel to one of 4 pre-set phase settings:

0 Phase

Sync Int

Quick set the phase of a channel to

0º.

Synchronizes the phase of both channels and sets the phase to 0º.

Degree Sets the phase of the selected channel.

Align Phase Aligns the timebase of both channels but doesn’t change the phase deviation of the channels. In other words it re-calibrates the phase difference between both of the channels.


CH1


3. To select the phase of the channel, press F1 (0 Phase),

F2 (Sync Int), F4 (Degree) or

F5 (Align Phase).

Phase F 5

0 Phase

F 1

~

Align Phase

F 5

179

Range

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

4. If Degree was selected, use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the phase.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

5. Press F5 (Degree) again to set the phase unit.

Degree

Degree

F 5

-180 º to 180º (Sets the phase of the selected channel)

Setting the output impedance

Background The AFG-3022/AFG-3032 has selectable output impedances for each channel: 50Ω or high impedance. The default output impedance is 50Ω.

The output impedances are to be used as a reference only. If the actual load impedance is different to that specified, then the actual amplitude and offset will vary accordingly.

Note The following describes how to set the output impedance on the AFG-3022 and 3032. To set the output impedance on the AFG-3021/3031, please

see page 175.


CH1

180


2. Press F1 (Load).

3. Select F1 (50 OHM) or F2

(High Z) to select the output impedance for the selected channel.

Load

F 1

F 1

50 OHM

~

High Z

F 2

DSO Link

Background

Note

DSO Link enables the AFG-3022 or AFG-3032 to receive lossless data from a GDS-2000 Series DSO to create ARB data for the selected channel.

All models support the DSO Link function.

However the menu tree operation varies between the single and dual channel models. The procedure here is only applicable to the AFG-3022 and AFG-

3032. For the AFG-3021/3031, please see page 176.

Panel Operation 1. Connect the AFG-3022/AFG-

3032 USB host port to the

GDS-2000’s USB B device port.

2. Press the CH1 or CH2 key.

CH1

3. Press F6 (DSOLink).

DSO Link F 6

4. Press F1 (Search).

Search F 1

181

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

5. To select the DSO channel, press F1 (CH1), F3 (CH2), F4

(CH3) or F5 (CH4). The acquired data can then be displayed.

CH1

F 1

~

CH4

F 4

6. After a few moments the AFG-30XX will automatically switch over to the ARB function and the waveform that was saved from the

DSO will be plotted as an ARB waveform.

See the ARB chapter to edit or save the resultant waveform.

Frequency Coupling

Background Frequency coupling sets the frequency of the unselected channel as a frequency offset from the selected channel or as a ratio of the frequency of the selected channel.


UTIL

2. Press F5 (Dual Ch).

Dual Ch F 5

182


3. Press F1 (Freq Cpl).

Freq Cpl F 1

4. To set the unselected channel’s frequency as an offset from the selected channel’s frequency, press F2

(Offset).

Offset F 2

Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the frequency offset.

7

4

1

0

Press F2~F6 to select the offset frequency units. uHz

F 2

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

~

MHz

F 6

5. To set the unselected channel’s frequency as a ratio of the selected channel’s frequency, press F3 (Ratio).

Ratio F 3

Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the ratio.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

Press F5 (Enter) to confirm.

Enter F 5

6. Alternatively, press F1 (OFF) to disable frequency coupling.

OFF F 1

183

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Range Offset Range

Offset Resolution

Ratio Range

Ratio Resolution

-30MHz ~ 30MHz

(-20MHz ~ 20MHz)

1uHz. Unselected channel’s frequency = selected channel’s frequency + offset.

Selected channel’s frequency is fixed.

1000.000 ~ 0.001

0.001. Ratio = Unselected channel’s frequency/selected channel’s frequency.

Selected channel’s frequency is fixed.

Amplitude Coupling

Background Amplitude coupling couples the amplitude of one channel to the other channel. When the amplitude settings for one channel are changed, those same settings are automatically reflected in the other channel.


UTIL

184



3. Press F2 (Ampl Cpl).

4. Press F1 to turn amplitude coupling ON or F2 to turn amplitude coupling OFF.

Dual Ch F 5

Ampl Cpl

ON

F 1

F 2

~

OFF

F 2

Channel Tracking

Background Channel tracking will set the waveform output of one channel to be the same as the other channel.

When the settings of one channel are changed, those changes are tracked on the other channel.

This function also has the ability to perform inverted tracking, where the output on one channel is inverted in relation to the other channel.


UTIL


Dual Ch F 5

3. Press F3 (Tracking).

Tracking F 3

185

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

4. To select the tracking function, press F1 (OFF), F2

(ON) or F3 (Inverted).

OFF

F 1

~

Inverted

F 3

186


Multi-Unit Syncing

Multiple units can be synchronized to the same clock. The clock source can be an external reference or the internal reference output from the master AFG-30XX.

Multi Unit Connection

Background

Daisy Chain

Connection

There are two different connection methods that can be used to perform multi-unit syncing, however the method chosen determines the number of units that can be synced and the propagation time of the sync clock. The two connection methods are detailed below:

When using the daisy-chain method, up to 4 units can be synced together. A BNC cable is connected from the master REF OUT port to the REF IN port of slave #1. The REF OUT port of slave #1 is connected to the REF IN port of slave #2 and so on up to slave #3.

EXT REF

(Optional)

BNC

OUT

BNC

OUT

BNC

OUT

BNC

OUT

REF REF REF REF

IN

42V

MAX

IN

42V

MAX

IN

42V

MAX

IN

42V

MAX

Master Slave #1 Slave #2 Slave #3

Note: The maximum phase delay for connected units that are daisy chained is defined by the following function:

Max. phase delay(ns)= 39+(N-2)*39 ±25nS

Where N is the number of connected units (total), for a maximum of 4.

187

Parallel

Connection

Note

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

When using the parallel connection method, a

BNC cable is connected from the master REF OUT port to a T-divider. The T-divider then connects to the REF IN port of the slave #1 and to the second

T-divider with BNC cables. This continues up to the second-last slave unit. The last slave unit terminates with a 50Ω terminator at the REF IN port. Up to 6 units in total can be connected together using the parallel connection method.

EXT REF

(Optional)

BNC BNC

T-divider

BNC

T-divider

OUT

BNC

OUT

BNC

BNC

OUT

50 Ω terminator

OUT

REF REF REF REF

IN

42V

MAX

IN

42V

MAX

IN

42V

MAX

IN

42V

MAX

Master Slave #1 Slave #2 Slave #n

Note: The maximum phase delay of connected units that are connected in parallel is defined by the following function:

Max. phase delay(ns) = (N-1)*6 ±25nS

Where N is the number of connected units (total), for a maximum of 6.

If the master unit is to use an external reference, connect the external reference signal to the rear panel

REF IN port.

10MHz Reference Input Specifications:

Input Voltage 0.5Vp-p to 5Vp-p

Input Impedance 1kΩ, unbalanced, AC coupled

Max. Allowed Input ± 10Vdc

Input Frequency 10MHz ±10Hz

Waveform sine or square (50± 5% duty)

10MHz, amplitude 0.5Vpp~5Vpp

188

Multi Unit Setup


Background The following will describe what configuration is required for the master and each connected slave

unit for multi-unit control. See page 173 details.

Note

When using the external reference function, the ARB and dual channel function is not supported. Please

see the reference clock sources chapter on page 173

for more details.


UTIL

2. Press F4 (System).

System

F 4

3. Press F3 (Clk Source).

Clk Source F 3

4. To configure the slave units:

*Return to

Independent

Operation

Press F2 (EXT) for each slave unit*. The slave units accept the reference signal from the master unit.

5. To configure the master unit:

EXT

Press F3 (EXT Sync) to start syncing the slave units.

EXT Sync

6. To return a slave unit back to independent operation, set

Clk Source to F1 (INT).

INT

F 2

F 3

F 1

189

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

190

ARBITRARY WAVEFORMS

A

RBITRARY WAVEFORMS

The AFG-30XX can create user-defined arbitrary waveforms. Each waveform can include up to 8M data points. Each data point has a vertical range of 65535 (±32767) with a sample rate of 250MSa/s.

Inserting Built-In Waveforms ........................................... 192

Inserting a Built-in Waveform ............................................ 192

Inserting a DC Waveform ................................................... 194

Inserting a Pulse Waveform ............................................... 196

Display an Arbitrary Waveform ........................................ 199

Set the Horizontal Display Range ...................................... 199

Set the Vertical Display Properties ..................................... 201

Page Navigation (Next Page) ............................................. 203

Page Navigation (Back Page) ............................................. 204

Overview Display ................................................................ 205

Editing an Arbitrary Waveform ......................................... 206

Adding a point to an Arbitrary Waveform .......................... 206

Adding a line to an Arbitrary Waveform ............................ 207

Copy a Waveform ............................................................... 209

Clear the Waveform ............................................................ 210

ARB Protection ................................................................... 212

Output an Arbitrary Waveform ......................................... 215

Output Length of an Arbitrary Waveform .......................... 215

Gated Output of the Arbitrary Waveform .......................... 216

Output an N Cycle Arbitrary Waveform ............................. 218

Output Arbitrary Waveforms – Infinite Cycles ................... 220

Saving/Loading an Arbitrary Waveform ............................ 222

Saving a Waveform to Internal Memory ............................ 222

Saving a Waveform to USB Memory ................................. 223

Load a Waveform from Internal Memory .......................... 226

Load a Waveform from USB .............................................. 228

191

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Inserting Built-In Waveforms

The AFG-30XX function generators contain a number of functions to create a number of common waveforms including sine, square, ramp, sin(x)/x, exponential rise, exponential fall, pulse and DC waveforms.

There are a total of 65 built-in waveforms to choose from. See page

414 for a graphical representation of each waveform.

Inserting a Built-in Waveform

The following operating procedure can be used to insert any of the built-in ARB waveforms except for the DC & pulse waveforms. See

page 194 & 196 to insert a DC or pulse waveform, respectively.

Panel Operation 1. Press the ARB key.

ARB

2. Press F3 (Built in).

Built in F 3

3. Press F1~F5 to select a subcategory of built-in waveforms and then select a built-in waveform.

Basic

Basic

F 1

~

More

F 5

Sine, Square, Ramp, Sinc, Exp

Rise, Exp Fall, Pulse, DC

Common 1

Common 2 absatan, havercosine, sinever, abssin, haversine, stair_down, abssinehalf, n_pulse, stair_ud, ampalt, negramp, stair_up attalt, rectpuls, stepresp, diric_even, roundhalf, trapezia, diric_odd, sawtoot, tripuls, gauspuls, sinetra

Math dlorentz, ln, sqrt, since, lorentz, xsquare, gauss

192


Trigonometric arccos, arctan, sech, arccot, arctanh, sinh, arccsc, cosh, tan, arcsec, cot, tanh, arcsin, csc, arcsinh, sec

Window barthannwin, chebwin, kaiser, bartlett, flattopwin, triang, blackman, hamming, tukeywin, bohmanwin, hann

4. The selected built-in waveform will be shown in red on the display. The remainder of the ARB waveform will be shown in green.

5. Press F1(Start).

Start F 1

6. The Start property will become highlighted in red.

7. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the Start address of the waveform.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

8. Press F5 (Enter) to confirm the Start point.

Enter F 5

9. Repeat steps 5~8 for Length

(F2) and Scale (F3).



Length

F 2

~

Scale

F 3

Length denotes how many points the waveform is stretched in the x direction.

 Scale denotes the vertical scale of the waveform from the center line.

193

Range

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Item

Start

Length

Scale

Setting Range

0 ~ 8388607

1 ~ 8388608

1 ~ 32767


Done F 4

11. Press F6 (Return) to return to the previous menus.

Return

Below a sine wave created at start: 0, Length: 40,

Scale: 32767

F 6

Inserting a DC Waveform



3. Press F1(Basic).

4. Press F5 (More).

194

ARB

Built in

Basic

More

F 3

F 1

F 5

Range


5. Press F3 (DC).

DC F 3

6. Press F1 (Start).

Start F 1


8. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the Start address of the DC waveform.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/


Enter F 5


(F2) and Data (F3).



Length

F 2

Data

F 3

Length denotes how many points the DC waveform is stretched in the x direction.

 Data denotes the vertical level of the DC waveform from the zero level.

Item

Start

Length

Data

Setting Range

0 ~ 8388607

1 ~ 8388608

-32767 ~ 32767



Done

Return

F 5

F 6

195

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Below a DC waveform created at start:0, Length:

524288, Data: 10000.

Inserting a Pulse Waveform

The following operating procedure can be used to insert a pulse waveform into an ARB waveform.

Range Frequency Resolution

1pHz~5Hz

>5Hz~50Hz

1pHz

1uHz

>50Hz~500Hz 10uHz

>500Hz~5kHz 100uHz

>5kHz~50kHz 1mHz

>50kHz~500kHz 10mHz


Duty Resolution

0.0001%

0.0001%

0.001%

0.01%

0.1%

1%

ARB


Built in

3. Press F1(Basic).

4. Press F5 (More).

5. Press F4 (Pulse).

Basic

More

Pulse

F 3

F 1

F 5

F 4

196


6. Press F1 (Frequency).

Frequency F 1

7. The Pulse Freq property will become highlighted in red.

8. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the pulse frequency.

1

7

4

0

9. Press F1~F5 to select the frequency unit. nHz

F 1

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

~ kHz

F 5

10. Press F2 (DUTY) and use the number pad or scroll wheel to choose the duty.

7

4

1

0

DUTY

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

F 2

11. Press F5 (%) to complete the operation.

% F 5


Done F 5


Return F 6

197

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Below a Pulse waveform created with a frequency of

100kHz and a duty cycle of 50%.

198


Display an Arbitrary Waveform

Set the Horizontal Display Range

The horizontal window bounds can be set in one of two ways: Using a start point and length, or a center point and length.


ARB

2. Press F1 (Display) to enter the display menu.

Display F 1

3. Press F1 (Horizon) to enter the horizontal menu.

Horizon F 1

Setting the

Window Bounds

The Length setting will determine the width of the display window. The Horizontal Start parameter will set the starting position of the display window. The Center parameter can be used to set the center point of the window.

4. Press (F2) Length.

Length F 2

5. The Length parameter will become highlighted.

6. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the Length value.

 F4 (clear) can be used to undo a value.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

199

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

7. Press F5 (Enter) to save the setting.

Setting the Start point or Center

Point

8. Repeat steps 4~8 for either

Start (F1) or Center F3.

 The Start soft-key is used to edit the Horizontal

From parameter.

Zoom in

Zoom out

Enter

Start

F 1

~

Center

F 3

9. To zoom into the arbitrary waveform, press F4 (Zoom

In). The Zoom In function will reduce the length by half each time the function is used. The minimum allowable length is 3.

Zoom in

10. To zoom out from the center point of the waveform, press

F5 (Zoom out). The Zoom out function will increase the length by 2. The maximum allowable length is 8388608.

Zoom out

F 5

F 4

F 5

Below, an arbitrary sine waveform has a start of 0, length of 40 and is centered at 20.

200


Set the Vertical Display Properties

Like the horizontal properties, the vertical display properties of the waveform display can be created in two ways: Setting high and low values, or setting the center point.


ARB


Display F 1

3. Press F2 (Vertical).

Vertical F 2

Setting the Low &

High Point

4. Press F1 (Low).

Low

5. The Vertical Low parameter will become highlighted.

F 1

6. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the Vertical Low value.

 F4 (clear) can be used to undo a value.

7. Press F5 (Enter) to save settings.

Setting the High

Point

8. Repeat steps 4~8 for High

(F2).

Setting the Center

Point

9. Repeat steps 4~8 for Center

(F3), if required.

1

0

7

4

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

Enter

High

Center

F 5

F 2

F 3

201

Zoom

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

10. To vertically zoom in from the center of the arbitrary waveform, press F4 (Zoom

In). The Zoom In function will reduce the amplitude by half each time the function is used. The minimum allowable vertical low is -2, and the minimum vertical high is 2.

Zoom in

11. To vertically zoom out of the waveform, press F5 (Zoom out). The Zoom out function will increase the amplitude by 2. The Vertical low maximum can be set to -

32767 and the vertical high maximum can be set to

+32767.

Zoom out

F 4

F 5

Below, the sine wave is with a vertical low of -16384, a vertical high 16384 and a center of 0. Note how the sine wave is clipped due to the vertical display bounds.

202


Page Navigation (Next Page)

Background When viewing the waveform, the display window can be moved forward and backward using the

Next/Back Page functions.


ARB


Display F 1

3. Press F3 (Next Page) to move the display window one view length forward.

Next Page F 3

New Horizon From*=Horizon From + Length

New Center=Center + Length

*Horizon From +Length ≤ 8388608

Below, shows the display after Next Page has been pressed.

Horizon From: 0  45

Length: 45

Center:22 67

203

204

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Page Navigation (Back Page)

Background When viewing the waveform, the display window can be moved forward and backward using the

Next/Back Page functions.


ARB


Display F 1

3. Press F4 (Back Page) to move the display window one view length backward.

Back Page

F 4

New Horizon From*＝Horizon From - Length

New Center*=Center – Length

*Length until 0

Below, shows the display after Back Page has been pressed.

Horizon From: 45  0

Length: 45

Center:67 22


Overview Display


ARB


Display F 1

3. To make the display window cover the whole waveform, press F5 (Overview).

Overview

Horizontal: 0~8388607,

Vertical: 32767~ -328767

Below shows the display after Overview has been selected.

Horizon From: 0

Length: 8388608

Center: 4194304

Vertical low/high: ±32767

F 5

205

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Editing an Arbitrary Waveform

Adding a point to an Arbitrary Waveform

Background The AFG-30XX has a powerful editing function that allows you to create points or lines anywhere on the waveform.


ARB

2. Press F2 (Edit).

Edit F 2

3. Press F1 (Point).

Point F 1

4. Press F1 (Address).

Address F 1

5. The Address parameter will become highlighted in red.

6. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the Address value.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/


8. Press F2 (Data).

Enter

Data

F 5

F 2

206


9. The Data parameter will become highlighted in red.

10. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter a Data value.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/


Enter F 5

12. Press F6 (Return) to return to the ARB menu.

Return F 6

Below shows Address set to 8 and Data set to 0.

The edited area is shown in red.

Adding a line to an Arbitrary Waveform

Background The AFG-30XX has a powerful editing function that allows you to create points or lines anywhere on the waveform.


ARB

2. Press F2 (Edit).

Edit F 2

207

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

3. Press F2 (Line).

Line F 2

4. Press F1 (Start ADD).

Start ADD

5. The Start Address parameter will become highlighted in red.

F 1

6. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the start address.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/


9. Press F5 (Done) to confirm the line edit.

Enter

8. Repeat steps 4~7 for Start Data (F2), Stop

Address (F3) and Stop Data (F4)

Done

F 5

F 5


Return F 6

A red line was created below with the following properties:

Start Address: 8, Start Data: 0

Stop Address: 15, Stop Data: 0

208


Copy a Waveform


ARB

2. Press F2 (Edit).

3. Press F3 (Copy).


Edit

Copy

Start

5. The Copy From properties will become highlighted in red.

F 2

F 3

F 1

6. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the Copy From address.


7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

Enter F 5

209

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

8. Repeat steps 4~7 for Length (F2) and Paste To

(F3).

9. Press F5 (Done) to confirm the selection.

Done F 5


Return F 6

A section of the waveform from points 30~45 was copied to points 0~15:

Copy From: 30

Length: 15

To: 0

Clear the Waveform


2. Press F2 (Edit).

3. Press F4 (Clear).


210

ARB

Edit

Clear

Start

F 2

F 4

F 1

5. The Clear From property will become highlighted in red.


Delete All

6. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the Clear From address.



(F2).

9. Press F3 (Done) to clear the section of the arbitrary waveform.


11. Press F5 (ALL) to delete the whole waveform.

12. Press F5 (Done) again to confirm the deletion.


Clear From: 0, Length: 15.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

Enter

Length

Done

Return

ALL

Done

Return

F 5

F 2

F 3

F 6

F 5

F 5

F 6

211

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

The same area after being cleared.

The result after the whole waveform is deleted.

ARB Protection

The protection function designates an area of the arbitrary waveform that cannot be altered.


2. Press F2 (Edit).

3. Press F5 (Protect).


ARB

Edit

Protect

Start

F 2

F 5

F 2

212


5. The Protect Start property will become highlighted in red.

Protect All

Unprotect All

6. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the Protect Start address.



(F3).

9. Press F5 (Done) to confirm the protected area.

10. The protected area will be shown in orange.

11. Press F1 (ALL) to protect the whole waveform.

12. Press F6 (Done) to confirm.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

Enter

Length

Done

ALL

Done

F 5

F 3

F 5

F 1

13. Press F5 (Unprotect) to release the protect function for the whole waveform.

14. Press F6 (Done) to confirm.

Unprotect

Done

F 6

F 5

F 6

213

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

15. The waveform background will return back to black. The property “Protect Off” will be shown in gray.

Below, the protected areas of the waveform are shown with an orange background:

Protect Start: 0, Length: 15.

214


Output an Arbitrary Waveform

Up to 8Mpts (0~8388607) of an arbitrary waveform can be output from the function generator. Arbitrary waveforms can also be output for a defined or infinite amount of cycles.

Output Length of an Arbitrary Waveform


ARB

2. Press F6 (Output).

Output F 6


Start F 1


5. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the Start address.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/



(F2).

Enter

Length

F 5

F 2

215

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Below the waveform from position 0 with a length of

1024 is output from the front panel terminal.

Gated Output of the Arbitrary Waveform

Background The ARB waveform output can be output using the rear panel trigger input when the trigger is set to Gate. The Gate trigger can be configured to output the arbitrary waveform on a positive or negative trigger level.


ARB


Output F 6

3. Define the Start and Length of the arbitrary waveform output.

Page 215.

Note: Changing the length will change the duty/ frequency of pulse waveforms.

4. Press F3 (Gate).

Gate F 3

216


5. Choose Positive or Negative to select the trigger polarity.



Pos

F 1

Neg

F 2

When a Gate mode is selected any previous trigger output setting is disabled.

 The Gated mode can be turned off by selecting a different output mode, such as

Ncycle or Infinite.

GATE Triggering 6. The ARB waveform will be output on either a high or low TTL level input from the

TRIG input terminal on the rear panel, for the selected channel.

TRIG Input

Trigger

Note: Ensure the output key has already been pressed and the OUTPUT light is lit before inputting a signal into the trigger input terminal.

7. Press F6 (Return) to return to the previous menu.

Return

Below shows the trigger set to Gate Pos.

F 6

217

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Output an N Cycle Arbitrary Waveform

Background The output of an arbitrary waveform can be repeated for a designated number of cycles. The N

Cycle function uses manual triggering or external triggering. Manual triggering will trigger each time.

Range 1 to 8388607 cycles


ARB


Output F 6


Page 215.



N Cycle F 4

5. Press F1 (Cycles).

Cycles F 1

6. The Cycles property will become highlighted in red.

218

Manual

Triggering

External

Triggering


7. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the number of cycles.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

8. Press F5 (Enter) to confirm the number of cycles.

9. Press Manual (F4) to set the unit to manual triggering.

10. Press Trigger (F5) to internally trigger the output once.

Enter

Manual

Trigger

F 5

F 4

F 5

Note: Ensure the output key has already been pressed and the OUTPUT light is lit before pressing F5

(Trigger).


Return

F 6

12. Press EXT (F3) to trigger using the external signal input from the TRIG input terminal on the rear panel.

EXT

13. The N-cycle waveform will be output on a rising edge of a TTL high level pulse input from the TRIG input terminal on the rear panel, for the selected channel.

TRIG Input

Trigger

F 3

Note: Ensure the output key has already been pressed and the OUTPUT light is lit before inputting a signal into the trigger input terminal.

219

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual


Return F 6

Below a waveform of 3 cycles is output from the front panel terminal.

Output Arbitrary Waveforms – Infinite Cycles

Background The output of an arbitrary waveform can be repeated an infinite amount of times to create a cyclic waveform.


ARB


Output F 6


Page 215.


4. Press F5 (Infinite) to output the arbitrary waveform infinitely.

Infinite F 5

220


Note: The ARB waveform will be output when the

Output key is pressed.


Return F 6

Below an infinite cycle waveform is output from the front panel terminal.

221

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Saving/Loading an Arbitrary Waveform

The AFG-30XX Series contain a number of functions to create a number of common waveforms including sine, square, ramp, sinc, exponential rise, exponential fall and DC waveforms.

Saving a Waveform to Internal Memory


ARB

2. Press F4 (Save).

Save

F 4


Start F 1



7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/



(F2).


Enter

Length

Memory

F 5

F 2

F 3

9. Select a memory file using the scroll wheel.

ARB0~ARB9

222


10. Press F1 (Select) to save the waveform to the selected file.

Select F 1


Return F 6

Below the file ARB1 is selected using the scroll wheel.

Saving a Waveform to USB Memory


ARB

2. Press F4 (Save).

Save F 4


Start F 1



7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

223

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual



(F2).

8. Press F4 (USB).

Enter

Length

F 5

F 2

USB F 4

9. Use the scroll wheel to navigate the filesystem.

10. Press Select to select directories or file names.

Select F 1

Create a Folder 11. Press F2 (New Folder).

New Folder F 2

12. The text editor will appear with a default folder name of “NEW_FOL”.

New Folder:

NEW_FOL

A

N O

1

B C D E F G H I J K L M

2

P

3

Q

4

R

5

S

6

T

7

U

8

V

9

W

0

X Y

_

Z

-

13. Use the scroll wheel to move the cursor.

224


14. Use F1 (Enter Char) or F2

(Backspace) to create a folder name.

Enter Char

F 1

~

Backspace

F 2

15. Press F5 (Save) to save the folder name.

Save F 5

Create New File 16. Press F3 (New File).

New File F 3

17. The text editor will appear with a default file name of “NEW_FIL”.

New File(CSV):

NEW_FIL

A

N O

1

B C D E F G H I

2

P

3

Q

4

R

5

S

6

T

7

U

8

V

9

J

W

0

K

X

L

Y

_

M

Z

-

18. Use the scroll wheel to move the cursor.

19. Use F1 (Enter Char) or F2

(Backspace) to create a file name.

20. Press F5 (Save) to save the file name.

Enter Char

F 1

~

Backspace

F 2

Save F 5

225

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Below, the folder “ABC” and the file “AFG.CSV” have been created in the root directory.

Load a Waveform from Internal Memory


ARB

2. Press F5 (Load).

Load

3. Press F1 (To) to choose the starting point to load the waveform from.

 Set to 0 by default

To

4. The “Load To” property will become highlighted in red.

F 5

F 1

5. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the starting point.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

226




Enter F 5

Memory F 3

8. Use the scroll wheel to navigate the filesystem.

9. Press Select to select directories or file names.

Select F 1

The ARB waveform will be loaded immediately.

Below the file ARB1 is selected using the scroll wheel loaded to position 0.

227

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Load a Waveform from USB


ARB

2. Press F5 (Load).

Load

3. Press F1 (To) to choose the starting point to load the waveform from.

 Set to 0 by default

To

4. The “Load To” property will become highlighted in red.

F 5

F 1

5. Use the selector keys and scroll wheel or number pad to enter the starting point.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/


7. Press F4 (USB).

Enter

USB

8. Use the scroll wheel to choose a file name.

F 5

F 4

228


9. Press F1 (Select) to select the file to load.

Select F 1

The ARB waveform will be loaded immediately.

Below the file AFG.CSV is selected using the scroll wheel loaded to position 0.

229

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

230

R

EMOTE INTERFACE

Establishing a Remote Connection .................................. 231

Web Browser Control Interface ........................................ 238

Command Syntax ............................................................. 241

Command List ................................................................. 246

488.2 Common Commands.............................................. 252


System Commands .......................................................... 261

Apply Commands ............................................................ 264

Output Commands .......................................................... 272


Harmonic Commands ...................................................... 286


AM Overview ................................................................... 289

Frequency Modulation (FM) Commands .......................... 294

FM Overview ................................................................... 294


FSK Overview .................................................................. 299


PM Overview ................................................................... 303


SUM Overview ................................................................. 307


PWM Overview ................................................................ 312

Frequency Sweep Commands........................................... 317

Sweep Overview .............................................................. 317


Burst Mode Overview ...................................................... 328

REMOTE INTERFACE


Arbitrary Waveform Overview .......................................... 338




Error Messages ............................................................... 387

SCPI Status Registers ...................................................... 400

Establishing a Remote Connection

The AFG-3021, AFG-3022, AFG3031 and AFG-3032 support USB,

LAN and GPIB remote connections.

Configure USB interface

USB configuration

PC side connector Type A, host

AFG-30XX side connector

Type B, slave

Speed 1.1/2.0 (full speed)

Panel Operation 1. Download and install the USB driver from the

GW Instek website, www.gwinstek.com

. Go to the Product > Signal Sources > Arbitrary

Function Generators > AFG-30XX product page to find the USB driver setup file.

Double click the driver file and follow the instructions in the setup wizard to install the driver.

2. Press the Utility key followed by Interface (F2) and USB

(F2).

UTIL

USB

Interface

231

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

3. Connect the USB cable to the rear panel USB B (slave) port.

232


Configure GPIB interface

GPIB configuration

Connector 24 pin Female

GPIB address 1-30

GPIB constraints  Maximum 15 devices altogether, 20m cable length, 2m between each device

 Unique address assigned to each device





At least 2/3 of the devices turned On

No loop or parallel connection

Pin assignment

12 1

24 13

Pin1 Data line 1

Pin2

Pin4

Pin5 EOI

Pin6

Pin8

Data line 2

Pin3 Data line 3

Data line 4

DAV

Pin7 NRFD

NDAC

Pin9 IFC

Pin10 SRQ

Pin11 ATN

Pin13 Data line 5

Pin14 Data line 6

Pin15 Data line 7

Pin16 Data line 8

Pin17 REN

Pin18 Ground

Pin19 Ground

Pin20 Ground

Pin21 Ground

Pin22 Ground

Pin23 Ground

Pin12 Shield (screen) Pin24 Signal ground

Panel Operation 1. Connect the GPIB cable to the rear panel GPIB port.

2. Press the Utility key followed by Interface (F2) and

GPIB(F1). Press Address (F1).

UTIL

GPIB

Interface

Address

233

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

3. Use the scroll wheel or number pad to choose an address.

7

4

1

0

8

5

2

9

6

3

/

4. Press Done (F5) to confirm.

Done

Configure LAN interface

LAN configuration

DHCP

Connections

MAC Address

Instrument Name

User Password

Instrument IP Address

HTTP Port 80 (fixed)

Domain Name

DNS IP Address

Gateway IP Address

Subnet Mask

Panel Operation 1. Connect the LAN cable to the rear panel LAN port.

LAN

2. Press the Utility key followed by Interface (F2) and LAN

(F3).

UTIL

LAN

Interface

Use DHCP to automatically configure the IP address of the unit for networks with a DHCP server.

3. Press Config (F2) followed by

DHCP (F1), Done(F5). Press

Done(F5) again.

Config

Done

DHCP

Done

234

Auto IP

Connections


Use Auto IP to automatically configure the IP address of the unit when it is directly connected to a host PC via the Ethernet cable.


Auto IP (F2), Done(F5). Press

Done(F5) again.

Config

Done

AutoIP

Done

Manually configure the IP address. Manual IP

Connections


Manual (F3).

Config

6. Press IP Addr (F1) and set the

IP address using the number pad. Press Done (F1) to complete setting the IP

Address.

IP Addr

7. Press NetMask (F2) and set the mask address using the number pad. Press Done (F1) to complete setting the net mask.

Net Mask

8. Press Gateway (F3) and set the gateway address using the number pad. Press Done

(F1) to complete setting the gateway.

Gateway

Manual

Done

Done

Done

9. Press Done (F5) to complete setting the manual IP address and to return to LAN interface menu. Press

Done(F5) again.

Done Done

235

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Setting the Host

Name

10. Press Host Name (F4).

Host Name

11. Enter the host name using the scroll wheel, arrow keys and soft-keys. Use the scroll wheel to highlight a character, and press Enter

Char (F1) to select the highlighted character.

Enter Char

12. Press Done (F5) to finish setting the Host Name. Press

Done(F5) again.

Done Done

Remote control terminal connection example

AFG Setup

Terminal application

Configure the interface to USB (page 231) and

connect the AFG to the PC.

Invoke the terminal application such as MTTTY

(Multi-Threaded TTY). Set the COM port in the application according to the COM port assigned to the AFG-30XX.

To check the COM port number, see the Device

Manager in the PC. For WinXP go to Control panel

→ System → Hardware tab.

Functionality check

Run this query command via the terminal.

*idn?

This should return the Manufacturer, Model number, Serial number, and Firmware version in the following format.

GW INSTEK,AFG-3032,SN:XXXXXXXX,Vm.mm

236

Display


When a remote connection is established all panel keys are locked except for F6.

1. Press REM/LOCK (F6) to return the function generator to local mode.

REM/LOCK

237

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Web Browser Control Interface

The AFG-30XX also has a browser-based interface to remotely control the unit over a network.

Overview

Welcome Page The Welcome Page is the home page for the browser control interface. This page lists instrument information and the LAN configuration. It also has links to the Browser

Web Control and the View & Modify

Configuration pages.

238

Browser Web

Control


The Browser Web Control allows you to remotely control and view the unit over a LAN.

The unit can be controlled via a virtual control panel using a mouse, with SCPI controls via an

SCPI input box or by running SCPI commands in a file.

View & Modify

Configuration

The View & Modify Configuration page displays all the LAN configuration settings and allows you to edit the configuration.

Operation 1. Configure the AFG-30XX interface to LAN and connect it to the LAN or directly to the PC (if the LAN interface is set to Auto IP).

See Page 234 for the LAN configuration details.

239

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

2. Next enable the virtual interface on the AFG-30XX.

Press the Utility key followed by Interface (F2), LAN (F3) and Remote (F1) to enable/disable the Virtual interface.

UTIL

LAN

Interface

Remote

3. Enter the IP address of the unit into the address bar of your web browser as follows:

4. The Welcome page will appear in the browser.

240


Command Syntax

Compatible standard





IEEE488.2, 1992 (fully compatible)

SCPI, 1994 (partially compatible)

Command Tree The SCPI standard is an ASCII based standard that defines the command syntax and structure for programmable instruments.

Commands are based on a hierarchical tree structure. Each command keyword is a node on the command tree with the first keyword as the root node. Each sub node is separated with a colon.

Shown below is a section of the SOURce[1|2] root node and the :PWM and :PULSe sub nodes.

Root node :SOURce[1|2]

2 nd node :PWM :PULSe

3 rd node :DUTY :EDGEtime :WIDTh

Command types Commands can be separated in to three distinct types, simple commands, compound commands and queries.

Simple

Example

A single command with/without a parameter

*OPC

Compound

Example

Two or more commands separated by a colon (:) with/without a parameter

SOURce1:PULSe:WIDTh

241

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Query

Example

A query is a simple or compound command followed by a question mark (?). A parameter (data) is returned. The maximum or minimum value for a parameter can also be queried where applicable.

SOURce1:FREQuency?

SOURce1:FREQuency? MIN

Command forms Commands and queries have two different forms, long and short. The command syntax is written with the short form of the command in capitals and the remainder (long form) in lower case. long long

SOURce1:DCOffset short short

The commands can be written in capitals or lowercase, just so long as the short or long forms are complete. An incomplete command will not be recognized.

Below are examples of correctly written commands:

LONG SOURce1:DCOffset

SOURCE1:DCOFFSET source1:dcoffset

SHORT SOUR1:DCO sour1:dco

242


Command

Format

SOURce1:DCOffset < offset >LF

1 2 3 4

1: command header

2: single space

3: parameter

4: message terminator

Square Brackets [] Commands that contain squares brackets indicate that the contents are optional. The function of the command is the same with or without the square bracketed items. Brackets are not sent with the command.

For example, the frequency query below can use any of the following 3 forms:

SOURce1:FREQuency? [MINimum|MAXimum]

Braces {}

Angled Brackets

<>

Bars |

Parameters

SOURce1:FREQuency? MAXimum

SOURce1:FREQuency? MINimum

SOURce1:FREQuency?

Commands that contain braces indicate one item within the braces must be chosen. Braces are not sent with the command.

Angle brackets are used to indicate that a value must be specified for the parameter. See the parameter description below for details. Angled brackets are not sent with the command.

Bars are used to separate multiple parameter choices in the command format.

Type

<Boolean>

<NR1>

<NR2>

<NR3>

<NRf>

Description

Boolean logic

Example

0, 1/ON,OFF integers 0, 1, 2, 3 decimal numbers 0.1, 3.14, 8.5 floating point 4.5e-1, 8.25e+1 any of NR1, 2, 3 1, 1.5, 4.5e-1

243

Message terminators

Note

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

<NRf+>

<Numeric>

<aard>

<discrete>

NRf type with a suffix including

MINimum,

MAXimum or

DEFault parameters.

Arbitrary ASCII characters.

Discrete ASCII character parameters

<frequency>

<peak deviation in Hz>

<rate in Hz>

NRf+ type including frequency unit suffixes.

1, 1.5, 4.5e-1

MAX, MIN,

IMM, EXT,

MAN

1 KHZ, 1.0 HZ,

ΜHZ

<amplitude> NRf+ type including voltage peak to peak.

VPP

<offset> V

<seconds>

NRf+ type including volt unit suffixes.

NRf+ type including time unit suffixes.

NRf type

NS, S MS US

N/A <percent>

<depth in percent>

LF CR

LF

EOI line feed code (new line) and carriage return. line feed code (new line)

IEEE-488 EOI (End-Or-Identify)

^j or ^m should be used when using a terminal program.

244

Command

Separators


Space

Colon (:)

A space is used to separate a parameter from a keyword/command header.

A colon is used to separate keywords on each node.

Semicolon (;) A semi colon is used to separate subcommands that have the same node level.

Colon +

Semicolon (:;)

For example:

SOURce[1]:DCOffset?

SOURce[1]:OUTPut?

SOURce1:DCOffset?;OUTPut?

A colon and semicolon can be used to combine commands from different node levels.

Comma (,)

For example:

SOURce1:PWM:SOURce?

SOURce:PULSe:WIDTh?

SOURce1:PWM:SOURce?:;SOURc e:PULSe:WIDTh?

When a command uses multiple parameters, a comma is used to separate the parameters.

For example:

SOURce:APPLy:SQUare 10KHZ, 2.0

VPP, -1V

245

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Command List

488.2 Common Commands.............................................. 252

*IDN? ................................................................................. 252

*RST ................................................................................... 252

*TST? .................................................................................. 252

*OPC .................................................................................. 253

*OPC?................................................................................. 253

*WAI ................................................................................... 254


*CLS ................................................................................... 255

*ESE ................................................................................... 255

*ESR? .................................................................................. 256

*STB?.................................................................................. 256

*SRE ................................................................................... 257

*PSC ................................................................................... 258

STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition? .................................. 258

STATus:QUEStionable:EVENt?.......................................... 259

STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle ......................................... 259

STATus:PRESet .................................................................. 260

System Commands .......................................................... 261

SYSTem:ERRor? ................................................................. 261

SYSTem:INTerface ............................................................. 261

SYSTem:LOCal ................................................................... 261

SYSTem:REMote ................................................................ 262

SYSTem:LANGuage ........................................................... 262

SYSTem:VERSion? ............................................................. 262

Apply Commands ............................................................ 264

SOURce[1|2]:APPLy:SINusoid ........................................... 266

SOURce[1|2]:APPLy:SQUare .............................................. 266

SOURce[1|2]:APPLy:RAMP ................................................ 267

SOURce[1|2]:APPLy:PULSe ................................................ 267

SOURce[1|2]:APPLy:NOISe ................................................ 268

SOURce[1|2]:APPLy:TRIangle ............................................ 269

SOURce[1|2]:APPLy:DC ...................................................... 269

SOURce[1|2]:APPLy:HARMonic ......................................... 270

SOURce[1|2]:APPLy:USER ................................................. 270

SOURce[1|2]:APPLy? .......................................................... 271

Output Commands .......................................................... 272

SOURce[1|2]:FREQuency ................................................... 272

SOURce[1|2]:AMPLitude .................................................... 273

SOURce[1|2]:PHASe........................................................... 275

SOURce[1|2]:PHASe:ALIGn ............................................... 275

246


SOURce[1|2]:DCOffset ....................................................... 275

SOURce[1|2]:SQUare:DCYCle ............................................ 276

SOURce[1|2]:RAMP:SYMMetry .......................................... 277

OUTPut[1|2] ........................................................................ 278

OUTPut[1]:LOAD................................................................ 279

OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC ............................................................. 280

SOURce[1]:VOLTage:UNIT ................................................ 281


SOURce[1|2]:PULSe:WIDTh ............................................... 282

SOURce[1|2]:PULSe:DCYCle .............................................. 283

SOURce[1|2]:PULSe:EDGEtime ......................................... 283

SOURce[1|2]:PULSe:RISE ................................................... 284

SOURce[1|2]:PULSe:FALL .................................................. 285

SOURce[1|2]:PULSe:EXTended .......................................... 285

Harmonic Commands ..................................................... 286

SOURce[1|2]:HARMonic:TOTAl ......................................... 286

SOURce[1|2]:HARMonic:TYPE ........................................... 286

SOURce[1|2]:HARMonic:ORDEr ........................................ 287

SOURce[1|2]:HARMonic:DISPlay....................................... 288


AM Overview ...................................................................... 289

SOURce[1|2]:AM:STATe ..................................................... 290

SOURce[1|2]:AM:MODulation:INPut ................................ 290

SOURce[1|2]:AM:INTernal:FUNCtion ............................... 291

SOURce[1|2]:AM:INTernal:FREQuency ............................. 292

SOURce[1|2]:AM:DEPTh .................................................... 292

Frequency Modulation (FM) Commands ......................... 294

FM Overview ...................................................................... 294

SOURce[1|2]:FM:STATe ..................................................... 295

SOURce[1|2]:FM:MODulation:INPut ................................ 295

SOURce[1|2]:FM:INTernal:FUNCtion ................................ 296

SOURce[1|2]:FM:INTernal:FREQuency ............................. 297

SOURce[1|2]:FM:DEViation ............................................... 297


FSK Overview ..................................................................... 299

SOURce[1|2]:FSKey:STATe ................................................. 299

SOURce[1|2]:FSKey:MODulation:INPut ............................ 300

SOURce[1|2]:FSKey:FREQuency......................................... 301

SOURce[1|2]:FSKey:INTernal:RATE ................................... 301


PM Overview ...................................................................... 303

SOURce[1|2]:PM:STATe ..................................................... 304

SOURce[1|2]:PM:INTernal:FUNCtion ................................ 304

SOURce[1|2]:PM:INTernal:FREQuency ............................. 305

247

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

SOURce[1|2]:PM:DEViation ............................................... 305


SUM Overview ................................................................... 307

SOURce[1|2]:SUM:STATe .................................................. 308

SOURce[1|2]:SUM:MODulation:INPut ............................. 308

SOURce[1|2]:SUM:INTernal:FUNCtion ............................. 309

SOURce[1|2]:SUM:INTernal:FREQuency .......................... 310

SOURce[1|2]:SUM:AMPLitude .......................................... 310


PWM Overview .................................................................. 312

SOURce[1|2]:PWM:STATe ................................................. 313

SOURce[1|2]:PWM:MODulation:INPut ............................. 313

SOURce[1|2]:PWM:INTernal:FUNction ............................ 314

SOURce[1|2]:PWM:INTernal:FREQuency.......................... 314

SOURce[1|2]:PWM:DUTY .................................................. 315

Frequency Sweep Commands........................................... 317

Sweep Overview ................................................................. 317

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:STATe ............................................... 318

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:TYPE ................................................. 318

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:MODE .............................................. 319

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:SHAPe .............................................. 319

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:MANual:TRIGger ............................. 320

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:FREQuency:STARt ........................... 320

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:FREQuency:STOP ............................ 321

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:FREQuency:CENTer ......................... 322

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:FREQuency:SPAN ............................ 323

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:FUNCtion ......................................... 323

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:TIME................................................. 324

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:TRIGger ............................................ 325

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:AMPLitude:STARt ............................ 326

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:AMPLitude:STOP ............................. 327


Burst Mode Overview ........................................................ 328

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:STATe ................................................ 330

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:MODE ............................................... 330

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:NCYCles ............................................ 331

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:INTernal:PERiod ............................... 332

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:PHASe ............................................... 333

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:MANual:TRIGger .............................. 334

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:TRIGger ............................................. 334

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:TRIGger:DELay ................................. 335

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:TRIGger:SLOPe ................................. 335

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:GATE:POLarity .................................. 336


248


Arbitrary Waveform Overview ............................................ 338

SOURce[1|2]:DATA:DAC .................................................... 339

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:EDIT:COPY ........................................... 340

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:EDIT:DELete ......................................... 341

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:EDIT:DELete:ALL .................................. 341

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:EDIT:POINt........................................... 341

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:EDIT:PROTect ....................................... 342

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:EDIT:PROTect:ALL ............................... 343

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:EDIT:UNProtect .................................... 343

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SINusoid ..................................... 343

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SQUare ....................................... 343

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:PULSe ......................................... 344

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:RAMP .......................................... 345

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SINC ........................................... 345

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:EXPRise ...................................... 346

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:EXPFall........................................ 346

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:DC ............................................... 347

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:STAIR_UD .................................. 347

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:STAIR_DOWN ............................ 348

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:STAIR_UP ................................... 348

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ABSATAN ................................... 348

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ABSSIN ....................................... 349

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ABSSINHALF ............................. 349

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:AMPALT...................................... 350

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ATTALT ....................................... 350

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:DIRIC_EVEN............................... 351

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:DIRIC_ODD .............................. 351

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:GAUSPULS ................................. 352

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:HAVERCOSINE .......................... 352

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:HAVERSINE ............................... 353

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:N_PULSE .................................... 353

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:NEGRAMP .................................. 353

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:RECTPULS .................................. 354

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ROUNDHALF ............................. 354

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SAWTOOTH ............................... 355

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SINETRA ..................................... 355

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:STEPRESP ................................... 356

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SINEVER ..................................... 356

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:TRAPEZIA ................................... 357

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:TRIPULS ..................................... 357

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:DLORENTZ ................................ 358

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:GAUSS ........................................ 358

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:LN ............................................... 359

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:LORENTZ ................................... 359

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SINCE ......................................... 360

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SQRT .......................................... 360

249

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:XSQUARE ................................... 361

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ARCCOS ..................................... 361

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ARCCOT ..................................... 362

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ARCCSC ...................................... 362

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ARCSEC ...................................... 363

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ARCSIN ...................................... 363

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ARCSINH ................................... 364

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ARCTAN ..................................... 364

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ARCTANH .................................. 365

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:COSH ......................................... 365

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:COT ............................................ 366

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:CSC ............................................. 366

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SEC ............................................. 367

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SECH .......................................... 367

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SINH .......................................... 368

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:TAN ............................................ 368

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:TANH ......................................... 369

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:BARTHANNWIN........................ 369

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:BARLETT .................................... 370

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:BLACKMAN ................................ 370

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:BOHMANWIN ........................... 371

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:CHEBWIN .................................. 371

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:FLATTOPWIN ............................ 372

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:HAMMING ................................ 372

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:HANN ........................................ 373

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:KAISER ....................................... 373

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:TRIANG ...................................... 374

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:TUKEYWIN ................................. 374

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:OUTPut ................................................. 375

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:RATE ..................................................... 375

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:GATE ..................................................... 376

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:NCYCles ................................................ 377

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:NCYCles:CYCle ..................................... 377

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:MANual:TRIGger .................................. 378


SOURce[1|2]:COUPle:FREQuency:MODE......................... 379

SOURce[1|2]:COUPle:FREQuency:OFFSet ........................ 380

SOURce[1|2]:COUPle:FREQuency:RATio .......................... 381

SOURce[1|2]:COUPle:AMPLitude ...................................... 382

SOURce[1|2]:TRACking:STATe .......................................... 382


SOURce[1|2]:REFerence ..................................................... 384

SOURce[1|2]:REFerence:SYNChronous ............................ 384


*SAV ................................................................................... 385

250


*RCL ................................................................................... 385

MEMory:STATe:DELete ...................................................... 385

MEMory:STATe:DELete ALL .............................................. 386

MEMory:STATe? ................................................................. 386

251

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

488.2 Common Commands

*IDN?

System Query

Description

Query Syntax

Returns the function generator manufacturer, model number, serial number and firmware version number in the following format:


IDN?

Return parameter <string>

Example *IDN?


Returns the identification of the function generator.

*RST

Description

Note

Syntax

System Command

Reset the function generator to its factory default state.

Note the *RST command will not delete instrument save states in memory.

*RST

*TST?

Description

Note

Query Syntax

System Query

Performs a system self-test and returns a pass or fail judgment. An error message will be generated if the self test fails.

The error message can be read with the SYST:ERR? query.

*TST?

252


Return parameter +0

+1

Example

Pass judgment

Fail judgment

*TST?

+0

The function generator passed the self-test.

*OPC

Description

Note

Syntax

System Command

This command sets the Operation Complete Bit

(bit 0) of the Standard Event Status Register after the function generator has completed all pending operations. For the AFG-30XX, the *OPC command is used to indicate when a sweep or burst has completed.

Before the OPC bit is set, other commands may be executed.

*OPC

*OPC?

Description

Note

System Query

Returns the OPC bit to the output buffer when all pending operations have completed. I.e. when the

OPC bit is set.

Commands cannot be executed until the *OPC? query has completed.

Query Syntax

Example

*OPC?

Return parameter 1

*OPC?

1

Returns a “1” when all pending operations are complete.

253

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

*WAI

Description

Note

Syntax

System Command

This command waits until all pending operations have completed before executing additional commands. I.e. when the OPC bit is set.

This command is only used for triggered sweep and burst modes.

*WAI

254


Status Register Commands

*CLS

Description

Syntax

System Command

The *CLS command clears all the event registers, the error queue and cancels an *OPC command.

*CLS

*ESE

Description

Note

System Command

The Standard Event Status Enable command determines which events in the Standard Event

Status Event register can set the Event Summary

Bit (ESB) of the Status Byte register. Any bit positions set to 1 enable the corresponding event.

Any enabled events set bit 5 (ESB) of the Status

Byte register.

The *CLS command clears the event register, but not the enable register.

*ESE <enable value>

<enable value> 0~255

Syntax

Parameter

Example

Query Syntax

*ESE 20

Sets a bit weight of 20 (bits 2 and 4).

*ESE?

Return Parameter Bit

0

1

2

Register

Operation complete bit

Not Used

Query Error

Bit

4

5

6

Register

Execution Error

Command Error

Not Used

3 Device Error 7 Power On

255

Example

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

*ESE?

4

Bit 2 is set.

*ESR?

Description

Note

Query Syntax

System Command

Reads and clears the Standard Event Status

Register. The bit weight of the standard event status register is returned.

The *CLS will also clear the standard event status register.

*ESR?


0

1

2

3

Register

Operation

Complete

Not Used

Query Error

Device Error

Bit

4

5

6

7

Register

Execution Error

Command Error

Not Used

Power On

Query Example *ESR?

5

Returns the bit weight of the standard event status register (bit 0 and 2).

*STB?

Description

Note

Syntax

System Command

Reads the Status byte condition register.

Bit 6, the master summary bit, is not cleared.

*STB?

256


*SRE

Description

Note

Syntax

System Command

The Service Request Enable Command determines which events in the Status Byte Register are allowed to set the MSS (Master summary bit). Any bit that is set to “1” can cause the MSS bit to be set.

The *CLS command clears the status byte event register, but not the enable register.

*SRE <enable value>


Parameter

Example

Query Syntax

*SRE 12

Sets a bit weight of 12 (bits 2 and 3) for the service request enable register.

*SRE?


0

1

2

Register

Not used

Not used

Error Queue

Bit

4

5

6

Register

Message Available

Standard Event

Master Summary*

3 Questionable

Data

7 Not used

* The Master Summary (MSS) bit cannot be used to set itself.

Query Example *SRE?

12

Returns the bit weight of the status byte enable register.

257

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

*PSC

System Command

Description

Syntax

The Power-On Status Clear command is used to clear a number enable registers at power-on.

The following enable register groups are cleared when the *PSC command is enabled:

Questionable data enable register

Standard operation enabled register

Status byte condition enable register

Standard event enable register

*PSC {OFF|ON}

OFF

ON

Disables PSC.

Enables PSC.

Parameter

Example *PSC OFF

Disables the Power-On Status Clear function.

Query Syntax *PSC?

Return Parameter 0

1

PSC disabled

PSC enabled

Example *PSC?

0

PSC is disabled.

STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?

Description

Note

Query Syntax

System Command

Reads the Questionable Status Condition register.

The bit weight of the register is returned.

This command will not clear the Status

Questionable Condition register.

STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?

Return Parameter Bit Register Bit Register

258


0 Voltage overload 4 Over temperature

5

8

Loop unlock

Cal Error

7

9

Ext Mod Overload

External Reference

Query Example STAT:QUES:COND?

0

Returns the bit weight of the questionable status condition register (bit 0). Indicates that there are no errors.

STATus:QUEStionable:EVENt?

Description

Query Syntax

System Command

Reads and clears the Questionable Status Event register. The bit weight of the register is returned.

STATus:QUEStionable:EVENt?


0

5

8

Register

Voltage overload 4

Loop unlock

Cal Error

Bit

7

9

Register

Over temperature

Ext Mod Overload

External Reference

Query Example STAT:QUES:EVEN?

16

Returns the bit weight of the questionable status event register (bit 0). Indicates that an over temperature (bit 4) event has occurred.

STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle

Description

System Command

This command determines which events in the

Questionable Status Register group are allowed to set the Questionable Data bit in the Status Byte register.

Syntax

Parameter

STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle<enable value>


259

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Example

Query Syntax


0

5

8

STAT:QUES:ENAB 17

Sets a bit weight of 17 (bits 0 and 4). I.e, enables voltage overload and over temperature bits.

STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle?

Register

Voltage overload 4

Loop unlock

Cal Error

Bit

7

9

Register

Over temperature

Ext Mod Overload

External Reference

Query Example STAT:QUES:ENAB?

17

Returns the bit weight of the questionable status enable register.

STATus:PRESet

Description

Syntax

Example

System Command

Clears the Questionable Status Enable registers.

STATus:PRESet

STAT:PRES

Clears the Questionable Status Enable registers.

260

System Commands


SYSTem:ERRor?

Description

System Query

Reads an error from the error queue. See page 405

for details regarding the error queue.

Query Syntax SYSTem:ERRor?

Return parameter <string> Returns an error string,

<256 ASCII characters.

Example SYSTem:ERRor?

-138 Suffix not allowed

Returns an error string.

SYSTem:INTerface

Description

System Command

Selects the remote interface. USB is the factory default.

Note

Syntax

Example

There is no interface query.

SYSTem:INTerface {GPIB|LAN|USB}

SYST:INT USB

Sets the interface to USB.

SYSTem:LOCal

Description

System Command

Sets the function generator to local mode. In local mode, all front panel keys are operational.

Syntax

Example

SYSTem:LOCal

SYST:LOC

261

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

SYSTem:REMote

Description

System Command

Disables the front panel keys and puts the function generator into remote mode.

Syntax SYSTem:REMote

Example SYST:REM

SYSTem:LANGuage

Description

System Command

Sets or queries the display language. Select the language shown on the function generator frontpanel display. Only one language can be enabled at a time. SYSTem:LANGuage? query returns

“CHIN”, “ENF” or “TRCH”.

Note

Syntax

Example

Only one language can be set.

SYSTem:LANGuage {CHINese|ENGlish|TRCHinese}

SYST:LANG ENG

Sets the display language to English.

Query Syntax SYSTem:LANGuage?

Return Parameter CHIN Chinese

ENG

TRCH

English

Traditional Chinese

Query Example SYST:LANG?

ENG

The current language is English.

SYSTem:VERSion?

Description

System Query

Performs a system version query. Returns a string with the instrument, firmware version, FPGA revision and bootloader.

262


Query Syntax

Example

SYSTem:VERSion?

Return parameter <string>

SYST:VERS?

AFG-3032 VX.XXX_XXXX FPGA:XXXX

BootLoad:XXXX

Returns the date and version for that date.

263

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Apply Commands

The APPLy command has 8 different types of outputs (Sine, Square,

Ramp, Pulse, Noise, Triangle, Harmonic, User). The command is the quickest, easiest way to output waveforms remotely. Frequency, amplitude and offset can be specified for each function.

As only basic parameters can be set with the Apply command, other parameters use the instrument default values.

The Apply command will set the trigger source to immediate and disable burst, modulation and sweep modes. Turns on the output command OUTP[1|2] ON. The termination setting will not be changed.

As the frequency, amplitude and offset parameters are in nested square brackets, amplitude can only be specified if the frequency has been specified and offset can only be specified if amplitude has been set. For the example:

SOURce[1|2]:APPLy:SINusoid [<frequency> [,<amplitude>

[,<offset>] ]]

Output Frequency For the output frequency, MINimum, MAXimum and DEFault can be used. The default frequency for all functions is set to 1 kHz. The maximum and minimum frequency depends on the function used. If a frequency output that is out of range is specified, the max/min frequency will be used instead. A “Data out range error will be generated” from the remote terminal.

264


Output

Amplitude

When setting the amplitude, MINimum,

MAXimum and DEFault can be used. The range depends on the function being used and the output termination (50Ω or high impedance). The default amplitude for all functions is 100 mVpp (50Ω).

If the amplitude has been set and the output termination is changed from 50Ω to high impedance, the amplitude will double. Changing the output termination from high impedance to

50Ω will half the amplitude.

Vrms, dBm or Vpp units can be used to specify the output unit to use with the current command. The

SOURce[1|2]:VOLT:UNIT command can be used to set the units when no unit is specified with the

Apply command. If the output termination is set to high impedance, dBm units cannot be used. The units will default to Vpp.

The output amplitude can be affected by the function and unit chosen. Vpp and Vrms or dBm values may have different maximum values due to differences such as crest factor. For example, a

5Vrms square wave must be adjusted to 3.536

Vrms for a sine wave.

DC Offset voltage The offset parameter can be set to MINimum,

MAXimum or DEFault. The default offset is 0 volts. The offset is limited by the output amplitude as shown below.

|Voffset| < Vmax – Vpp/2

If the output specified is out of range, the maximum offset will be set.

265

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

The offset is also determined by the output termination (50Ω or high impedance). If the offset has been set and the output termination has changed from 50Ω to high impedance, the offset will double. Changing the output termination from high impedance to 50Ω will half the offset.

SOURce[1|2]:APPLy:SINusoid

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Outputs a sine wave from the selected channel when the command has executed. Frequency, amplitude and offset can also be set.

SOURce[1|2]:APPLy:SINusoid [<frequency>

[,<amplitude> [,<offset>] ]]

<frequency> 1μHz~30MHz

(20MHZ AFG-3021/3022)

< amplitude >

1mV~10V (50 Ω) (3.536

Vrms)

<offset>

-4.99~4.99V (50 Ω)

Example SOUR1:APPL:SIN 2KHZ,MAX,MAX

Sets frequency to 2kHz and sets the amplitude and offset to the maximum.

SOURce[1|2]:APPLy:SQUare

Description

Syntax

Source Specific

Command

Outputs a square wave from the selected channel when the command has executed. Frequency, amplitude and offset can also be set. The duty cycle is set to 50%.

SOURce[1|2]:APPLy:SQUare [<frequency>


266


Parameter

Example


(20MHz AFG-3021/3022)

< amplitude >

1mV~10V (50 Ω)

<offset>

-4.99V~4.99V (50 Ω)

SOUR1:APPL:SQU 2KHZ,MAX,MAX


SOURce[1|2]:APPLy:RAMP

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Example

Source Specific

Command

Outputs a ramp wave from the selected channel when the command has executed. Frequency, amplitude and offset can also be set. The symmetry is set to 50%.

SOURce[1|2]:APPLy:RAMP [<frequency>


<frequency>

< amplitude >

1μHz~1MHz

1mV~10V (50 Ω)

<offset>

-4.99V~4.99V (50 Ω)

SOUR1:APPL:RAMP 2KHZ,MAX,MAX


SOURce[1|2]:APPLy:PULSe

Source Specific

Command

Description Outputs a ramp wave from the selected channel when the command has executed. Frequency, amplitude and offset can also be set.

267

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Note

Syntax

Parameter

Example

The PW settings from the SOURce[1]:PULS: WIDT command are preserved. Edge and pulse width may be adjusted to supported levels.

Repetition rates will be approximated from the frequency. For accurate repetition rates, the period should be adjusted using the

SOURce[1]:PULS:PER command

SOUR[1|2]:APPLy:PULSe [<frequency> [,<amplitude>

[,<offset>] ]]


(20MHz AFG-3021/3022)

< amplitude >

1mV~10V (50 Ω)

<offset>

-4.99V~4.99V (50 Ω)

SOUR1:APPL:PULS 1KHZ,MIN,MAX

Sets the frequency to 1kHz, sets the amplitude to the minimum and the offset to the maximum.

SOURce[1|2]:APPLy:NOISe

Description

Note

Source Specific

Command

Outputs white noise (no set bandwidth).

Amplitude and offset can also be set.

Frequency cannot be used with the noise function; however a value (or DEFault) must be specified.

The frequency is remembered for the next function used.

Syntax

Parameter

Example

SOURce[1|2]:APPLy:NOISe [<frequency|DEFault>


<frequency|DEFault> Not applicable

< amplitude >

1mV~10V (50 Ω)

<offset>

-4.99V~4.99V (50 Ω)

SOUR1:APPL:NOIS DEF,3.0,1.0

268


Sets the amplitude to 3 volts with an offset of 1 volt.

SOURce[1|2]:APPLy:TRIangle

Description

Source Specific

Command

Outputs a triangle wave from the selected channel when the command has executed. Frequency, amplitude and offset can also be set.

Syntax

Parameter

Example

SOURce[1|2]:APPLy:TRIangle [<frequency>



< amplitude >

1mV~10V (50 Ω)

<offset>

-4.99V~4.99V (50 Ω)

SOUR1:APPL:TRI 2khz,3.0,1.0

Sets the frequency to 1 MHz with an amplitude of

3 volts and with an offset of 1 volt.

SOURce[1|2]:APPLy:DC

Description

Source Specific

Command

Outputs a DC signal from the selected channel when the command has executed. Amplitude and offset can also be set.

Note Frequency and amplitude cannot be used with the

DC function; however a value (or DEFault) must be specified.

Syntax

Parameter

Example

SOURce[1|2]::APPLy:DC

[<frequency>|DEFault[,<amplitude>|DEFault[,

<offset>]]]

<frequency|DEFault>

<amplitude|DEFault>

Not applicable

Not applicable

<offset>

-5V~5V (50 Ω)

SOUR1:APPL:DC DEF,3.0,1.0

269

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Sets the DC voltage to 1 volts (amplitude setting is ignored).

SOURce[1|2]:APPLy:HARMonic

Description

Source Specific

Command

Outputs a sine wave with harmonic components from the selected channel when the command has executed. Frequency, amplitude and offset can also be set. The maximum frequency is limited by the highest order. Highest order n: maximum frequency is 30MHz/n or 20MHz/n for AFG-

3021/3022)).

Syntax

Parameter

Example

SOURce[1|2]:APPLy:HARMonic [<frequency>



(20MHz AFG-3021/3022)

< amplitude >

1mV~10V (50 Ω)

(3.536 Vrms)

<offset>

-4.99V~4.99V (50 Ω)

SOUR1:APPL:HARM 2KHZ,MAX,MAX

Sets the frequency to 2kHz and sets the amplitude and offset to the maximum.

SOURce[1|2]:APPLy:USER

Description

Note

Source Specific

Command

Outputs an arbitrary waveform from the selected channel. The output is that specified from the

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ARB_waveform command (Example:

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SQUare).

Frequency and amplitude cannot be used with the

DC function; however a value (or DEFault) must be specified. The values are remembered for the next function used.

270


Syntax

Parameter

Example

SOURce[1]:APPLy:USER [<frequency> [,<amplitude>

[,<offset>] ]]

<frequency>

<amplitude>

1µHz~125MHz

1mV~10V (50 Ω)

<offset>

-4.99V~4.99V (50 Ω)

SOUR1:APPL:USER

SOURce[1|2]:APPLy?

Source Specific

Command

Description

Note

Outputs a string with the current settings for the selected channel.

The string can be passed back appended to the

Apply Command.

Syntax SOURce[1|2]:APPLy?

Return Parameter <string> Function, frequency, amplitude, offset

Example SOUR1:APPL?

SIN +5.0000000000000E+03,+3.0000E+00,-2.50E+00

Returns a string with the current function and parameters, Sine, 5kHz, 3Vpp, -2.5V offset.

271

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Output Commands

Unlike the Apply commands, the Output commands are low level commands to program the function generator.

This section describes the low-level commands used to program the function generator. Although the APPLy command provides the most straightforward method to program the function generator, the low-level commands give you more flexibility to change individual parameters.

SOURce[1|2]:FREQuency

Description

Note

Source Specific

Command

Sets the output frequency for the selected channel and the query command returns the current frequency setting.

The maximum and minimum frequency depends on the function mode.

Sine, Square, Harmonic 1μHz~30MHz

(20MHz AFG-3021/3022)

Ramp, Triangle

1μHz~1MHz

Pulse

1μHz~25MHz

(20MHz AFG-3021/3022)

Noise, DC

Not applicable

User

1pHz~125MHz

272


If the function mode is changed and the current frequency setting is not supported by the new mode, the frequency setting will be altered to next highest value.

The duty cycle of square waveforms depends on the frequency settings.

20% to 80% (frequency < 25 MHz)

40% to 60% (25 MHz < frequency ≤ 30 MHz)

If the frequency is changed and the set duty cycle cannot support the new frequency, the highest duty cycle available at that frequency will be used.

A “settings conflict” error will result from the above scenario.

Syntax

Example

SOURce[1|2]:FREQuency

{<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}

SOUR1:FREQ MAX

Sets the frequency to the maximum for the current mode.

SOURce[1|2]:FREQuency?

Query Syntax

Return Parameter <NR3>

Example

Returns the frequency for the current mode.

SOUR1:FREQ? MAX

+1.0000000000000E+03

The maximum frequency that can be set for the current function is 1MHz.

SOURce[1|2]:AMPLitude

Description

Note

Source Specific

Command

Sets the output amplitude or queries the current amplitude settings for the selected channel.

The maximum and minimum amplitude depends on the output termination. The default amplitude for all functions is 3Vpp (50Ω). If the amplitude has been set and the output termination is changed

273

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual from 50Ω to high impedance, the amplitude will double. Changing the output termination from high impedance to 50Ω will half the amplitude.

The offset and amplitude are related by the following equation.


If the output termination is set to high impedance, dBm units cannot be used. The units will default to

Vpp.

The output amplitude can be affected by the function and unit chosen. Vpp and Vrms or dBm values may have different maximum values due to differences such as crest factor. For example, a

5Vrms square wave must be adjusted to 3.536

Vrms for a sine wave.

The amplitude units can be explicitly used each time the SOURce[1]:AMPlitude command is used.

Alternatively, the SOURce[1|2]:VOLT:UNIT command can be used to set the amplitude units for all commands.

The amplitude parameter cannot be set for the DC waveform.

Syntax

Example

SOURce[1|2]:AMPLitude {< amplitude>

|MINimum|MAXimum}

SOUR1:AMPL MAX

Sets the amplitude to the maximum for the current mode.

Query Syntax SOURce[1|2]:AMPLitude? {MINimum|MAXimum}

Return Parameter <NR3> Returns the amplitude for the current mode.

Example SOUR1:AMPL? MAX

+5.0000E+00

274


The maximum amplitude that can be set for the current function is 5 volts.

SOURce[1|2]:PHASe

Description

Source Specific

Command

Sets or queries the output phase angle (-360º~360º) of the selected channel. The default phase is 0º.

Note

Syntax

Example

Query Syntax

The Phase parameter cannot be set for the DC and

Noise waveforms.

SOURce[1|2]:PHASe{<angle> |MINimum|MAXimum}

SOUR[1]:PHAS:MAX

Sets the output phase to the maximum.

SOURce[1|2]:PHASe {MINimum|MAXimum}

Return Parameter <NR3> Returns the phase in degrees.

Example SOUR1:PHAS?

+1.2000E+01

The phase is set to 12º.

SOURce[1|2]:PHASe:ALIGn

Source Specific

Command

Description

Syntax

Example

Aligns the timebase of both channels but doesn’t change the phase deviation of the channels. In other words it re-calibrates the phase difference between both of the channels.

SOURce[1|2]:PHASe:ALIGn

SOUR[1]:PHAS:ALIG

Turns on the phase align function.

SOURce[1|2]:DCOffset

Description

Source Specific

Command

Sets or queries the DC offset for the current mode.

275

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Note The offset parameter can be set to MINimum,

MAXimum or DEFault. The default offset is 0 volts. The offset is limited by the output amplitude as shown below.


Syntax

Example

If the output specified is out of range, the maximum offset will be set.

The offset is also determined by the output termination (50Ω or high impedance). If the offset has been set and the output termination has changed from 50Ω to high impedance, the offset will double. Changing the output termination from high impedance to 50Ω will half the offset.

SOURce[1|2]:DCOffset {< offset>

|MINimum|MAXimum}

SOUR1:DCO MAX

Sets the offset to the maximum for the current mode.

SOURce[1|2]:DCOffset? {MINimum|MAXimum} Query Syntax


Example

Returns the offset for the current mode.

SOUR1:DCO?

+3.0000E+00

The offset for the current mode is set to +3 volts.

SOURce[1|2]:SQUare:DCYCle

Source Specific

Command

Description

Note

Sets or queries the duty cycle for square waves only. The setting is remembered if the function mode is changed. The default duty cycle is 50%.

The duty cycle of square waveforms depend on the frequency settings.

276


20% to 80% (frequency < 25 MHz)

40% to 60% (25 MHz < frequency ≤ 30 MHz)

If the frequency is changed and the set duty cycle cannot support the new frequency, the highest duty cycle available at that frequency will be used.

A “settings conflict” error will result from the above scenario.

Syntax

Example

Query Syntax

For square waveforms, the Apply command and

AM/FM modulation modes ignore the duty cycle settings.

SOURce[1|2]:SQUare:DCYCle {< percent>

|MINimum|MAXimum}

SOUR1:SQU:DCYC MAX

Sets the duty cycle to the highest possible for the current frequency.

SOURce[1|2]:SQUare:DCYCle?

{MINimum|MAXimum}


Example SOUR1:SQU:DCYC?

+5.00E+01

The duty cycle is set 50%.

Returns the duty cycle as a percentage.

SOURce[1|2]:RAMP:SYMMetry

Description

Source Specific

Command

Sets or queries the symmetry for ramp waves only.

The setting is remembered if the function mode is changed. The default symmetry is 50%.

Note For ramp waveforms, the Apply command and

AM/FM modulation modes ignore the current symmetry settings.

277

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Syntax

Example

Query Syntax

SOURce[1|2]:RAMP:SYMMetry {< percent>

|MINimum|MAXimum}

SOUR1:RAMP:SYMM MAX

Sets the symmetry to the 100%.

SOURce[1|2]:RAMP:SYMMetry?

{MINimum|MAXimum}


Example

Returns the symmetry as a percentage.

SOUR1:RAMP:SYMMetry?

+1.0000E+02

The symmetry is set as 100%.

OUTPut[1|2]

Source Specific

Command

Description

Note

Syntax

Example

Enables/Disables or queries the front panel output. The default is set to off.

If the output is overloaded by an external voltage, the output will turn off and an error message will be displayed. The overload must first be removed before the output can be turned on again with the output command.

Using the Apply command automatically sets the front panel output to on.

OUTPut[1|2] {OFF|ON}

OUTP1 ON

Turns the output on for channel 1.

OUTPut[1|2]?

Query Syntax

Return Parameter 1

0

Example OUTP1?

ON

OFF

1

The output is currently on for channel 1.

278


OUTPut[1]:LOAD

Description

Source Specific

Command

Sets or queries the output termination. Two impedance settings can be chosen, DEFault (50Ω) and INFinity (high impedance >10 kΩ).

The output termination is to be used as a reference only. If the output termination is set 50Ω but the actual load impedance is not 50Ω, then the amplitude and offset will not be correct.

Note

Syntax

If the amplitude has been set and the output termination is changed from 50Ω to high impedance, the amplitude will double. Changing the output termination from high impedance to

50Ω will half the amplitude.

If the output termination is set to high impedance, dBm units cannot be used. The units will default to

Vpp.

OUTPut[1]:LOAD {DEFault|INFinity}

Example OUTP1:LOAD DEF

Sets the output termination to 50Ω for channel 1.

Query Syntax OUTPut[1]:LOAD?

Return Parameter DEF Default

Example

INF INFinity

OUTP1:LOAD?

DEF

The output is set to the default of 50Ω for channel

1.

279

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC

Description

Source Specific

Command

This command turns waveform gating on or off for the selected channel’s output. When gating is turned on, it allows the output signal to be output when the trigger input is asserted. It does not turn the output on, change the phase or other timing characteristics.

For example: When gating is turned on the waveform is output when the trigger signal goes high. When the trigger signal is low the waveform continues to be generated internally. The next time the trigger signal is high, the internally generated waveform is output at that particular point in time, instead of a newly generated waveform.

Syntax OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC {OFF|ON}

Example

Query Syntax

OUTP1:SYNC ON

Turns gating on for channel 1.

OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC?

Return Parameter 1

0

Example

ON

OFF

OUTP1:SYNC?

1

The sync output is enabled for channel 1.

280


SOURce[1]:VOLTage:UNIT

Description

Note

Source Specific

Command

Sets or queries the output amplitude units. There are three types of units: VPP, VRMS and DBM.

The units set with the VOLTage:UNIT command will be used as the default unit for all amplitude units unless a different unit is specifically used for a command.

If the output termination is set to high impedance, dBm units cannot be used. The Units will automatically default to Vpp.

Syntax SOURce[1]:VOLTage:UNIT {VPP|VRMS|DBM}

Example SOUR1:VOLT:UNIT VPP

Sets the amplitude units to Vpp for channel 1.

Query Syntax SOURce[1]:VOLTage:UNIT?

Return Parameter VPP Vpp

Example

VRMS

DBM

Vrms dBm

SOUR1:VOLT:UNIT?

VPP

The amplitude units are set to Vpp.

281

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Pulse Configuration Commands

The pulse chapter is used to control and output pulse waveforms.

Unlike the APPLy command, low level control is possible including setting the rise time, fall time, period, pulse width and extended mode.

Period

90%

90%

50% Pulse Width 50%

10% 10%

Rise time Fall time

SOURce[1|2]:PULSe:WIDTh

Description

Note

Syntax

Source Specific

Command

Sets or queries the pulse width. The default pulse width is 500us.

Pulse width is defined as the time from the rising to falling edges (at a threshold of 50%).

The pulse width is restricted to the following limitations:

Pulse Width - 0.625 * [(Rise Time - 0.6nS) + (Fall

Time - 0.6nS)] ≧ 0

Period ≧Pulse Width+ 0.625 * [(Rise Time -

0.6nS)+(Fall Time - 0.6nS)]

SOURce[1|2]:PULSe:WIDTh

{<seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum}

Example SOUR1:PULS:WIDT MAX

Sets the pulse width to the maximum allowed.

SOURce[1|2]:PULSe:WIDTh? [MINimum|MAXimum] Query Syntax

Return Parameter <seconds>

Example SOUR1:PULS:WIDT? MIN

20ns ~ 999.83 ks

282


+2.0000E-08

The pulse width is set to 20 nanoseconds.

SOURce[1|2]:PULSe:DCYCle

Description

Note

Source Specific

Command

Sets or queries the pulse duty cycle.

The duty cycle is limited by the rise/fall time as noted below:

Duty ≧ 0.625×100×[rise time - 0.6ns +fall time -

0.6ns]/period

Duty ≦ 100 - {62.5×[(rise time - 0.6ns) + (fall time -

0.6ns)]/period}

Syntax SOURce[1|2]:PULSe:DCYCle{<percent>|MINimum|M

AXimum}

Example

Query Syntax

SOUR1:PULS:DCYC MAX

Sets the duty to the maximum allowed.

SOURce[1|2]:PULSe:DCYCle? [MINimum|MAXimum]


Example

0.0170%~99.983%

Resolution 0.0001%

SOUR1:PULS:DCYC?

+1.0000E+01

The duty cycle is set to 10%

SOURce[1|2]:PULSe:EDGEtime

Description

Note

Source Specific

Command

Sets or queries the pulse edge time. The default edge time is 10us. This command will set the rise time = the fall time = edge time.

The edge time is limited by the pulse width as noted below:


Time - 0.6nS)] ≧ 0

283

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Syntax

Example

Query Syntax



SOURce[1|2]:PULSe:EDGEtime{<seconds>|MINimum

|MAXimum}

SOUR1:PULS:EDGE MAX

Sets the edge time to the maximum allowed.

SOURce[1|2]:PULSe:EDGEtime?

[MINimum|MAXimum]


Example SOUR1:PULS:EDGE? MIN

9.32ns ~ 799.89ks

+9.3200E-09

The edge time is 9.32 nanoseconds.

SOURce[1|2]:PULSe:RISE

Description

Source Specific

Command

Sets or queries the pulse rise time. The default rise time is 10us. The rise and fall time can be different.

Range: 9.32ns ~ 799.89ks

Note The rise time is limited by the pulse width, period and fall time as noted below:


Time - 0.6nS)] ≧ 0



Syntax SOURce[1|2]:PULSe:RISE{<seconds>|MINimum|MAXi mum}

Example

Example

SOUR1:PULS:RISE MAX

Sets the rise time to the maximum allowed.

Query Syntax SOURce[1|2]:PULSe:RISE? [MINimum|MAXimum]

Return Parameter <NR3> 9.32ns ~ 799.89ks

SOUR1:PULS:FALL? MIN

+9.3200E-09

284


The minimum rise time is 9.32 nanoseconds.

SOURce[1|2]:PULSe:FALL

Description

Source Specific

Command

Sets or queries the pulse fall time. The default fall time is 10us. The rise and fall time can be different.

Range: 9.32ns ~ 799.89ks

Note The fall time is limited by the pulse width, period and rise time as noted below:


Time - 0.6nS)] ≧ 0



Syntax SOURce[1|2]:PULSe:FALL{<seconds>|MINimum|MAX imum}

Example SOUR1:PULS:FALL MAX

Sets the fall time to the maximum allowed.

Query Syntax SOURce[1|2]:PULSe:FALL? [MINimum|MAXimum]

Return Parameter <NR3> 9.32ns ~ 799.89ks

Example SOUR1:PULS:FALL? MIN

+9.3200E-09

The minimum fall time is 9.32 nanoseconds.

SOURce[1|2]:PULSe:EXTended

Description

Syntax

Example

Source Specific

Command

Sets or queries the pulse extended mode. The extended mode extends the pulse duty and width ranges.

SOURce[1|2]:PULSe:EXTended {OFF|ON}

Query Syntax

SOUR1:PULS:EXT ON

Sets the pulse extended mode to ON.

SOURce[1|2]:PULSe:EXTended? {OFF|ON}

285

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Return Parameter 0

1

Example

Disabled (OFF)

Enabled (ON)

SOUR1:PULS:EXT?

1

The pulse extended mode is currently enabled.

Harmonic Commands

SOURce[1|2]:HARMonic:TOTAl

Description

Syntax

Source Specific

Command

Sets the highest order harmonic for the harmonic output. By default this is set to 2.

SOURce[1|2]:HARMonic:TOTAl{<id>|MINimum|MAXi mum}

Example

Query Syntax

SOUR1:HARMonic:TOTAl MAX

Sets the highest order harmonic to the maximum allowed.

SOURce[1|2]:HARMonic:TOTAl?

[MINimum|MAXimum]


Example SOUR1:HARM:? MIN

2 ~ 8

2

Returns the minimum harmonic.

SOURce[1|2]:HARMonic:TYPE

Description

Syntax

Source Specific

Command

Specifies which harmonics are output; odd, even, all or user specified.

SOURce[1|2]:HARMonic:TYPE

{EVEN|ODD|ALL|USER,10000001}

286


Parameter/

Return Parameter

<EVEN>

Example

Query Syntax

Example

<ODD>

<ALL>

Output all even orders

Output all odd orders

Output all orders, subject to the number specified in

“SOURce[1|2]:HARMonic:

TOTAl” command.

<USER,

X 1 X 2 X 3 X 4 X 5 X 6 X 7 X 8 >

Outputs only the specified orders, where X = Boolean

(0, 1) X X = order number.

SOURce1:HARMonic:TYPE USER,11000001

Outputs only the 2 nd and 8 th harmonic. (1 st harmonic is the fundamental frequency)

SOURce[1|2]:HARMonic:TYPE?

SOUR1:HARM:TYPE?

EVEN 11000000

Returns EVEN harmonic (Limited to the 2 nd harmonic).

SOURce[1|2]:HARMonic:ORDEr

Description

Source Specific

Command

Sets or queries the amplitude and phase of each order. By default, each order is set to 3Vpp, with a phase of 0º.

Syntax

Parameter/

Return Parameter

SOURce[1|2]:HARMonic:ORDEr

{<id>,<amplitude>,<phase>}

<id> <NR1> Order number: 2

~8

<amplitude>

<phase>

<NR3> Amplitude of the selected order: 1mV ~ 10V

(50ohm impedance)

<NR3> Phase: -360 ~ -360º

287

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Example

Query Syntax

Example

SOURce1:HARMonic:ORDEr 2,3.0,180

Sets the 2 nd harmonic to 3.0Vpp and a phase of

180º.

SOURce[1|2]:HARMonic:ORDEr? <id>

Returns the <id>:,<amplitude>,<phase>.

SOUR1:HARM:ORDE? 2

Order 2 : 3.000E+00,1.800E+02

Returns the 2 nd harmonic settings as 3Vpp with a phase of 180º.

SOURce[1|2]:HARMonic:DISPlay

Description

Syntax

Source Specific

Command

Sets or queries whether the screen shows the harmonics in the frequency or time domain. The default setting is time domain.

SOURce[1|2]:HARMonic:DISPlay {FREQuency|TIME}

Parameter/

Return Parameter

FREQuency

TIME

Example

Query Syntax

Example

Sets the display to frequency

Sets the display to time

SOURce1:HARMonic:DISPlay TIME

Sets the display to TIME.

SOURce[1|2]:HARMonic:DISPlay?

Returns TIME or FREQ.

SOUR1:HARM:DISP?

TIME

Returns the display format as TIME.

288


Amplitude Modulation (AM) Commands

AM Overview

To successfully create an AM waveform, the following commands must be executed in order.

Enable AM

Modulation

1. Turn on AM modulation using the

SOURce[1|2]: AM:STAT ON command

Configure Carrier 2. Use the APPLy command to select a carrier waveform. Alternatively the equivalent FREQ,

AMPl, and DCOffs commands can be used to create a carrier waveform with a designated frequency, amplitude and offset.

Select

Modulation

Source

3. Select an internal or external modulation source using the SOURce[1|2]:AM:MOD:INP command.

Select Shape

4. Use the SOURce[1|2]:AM:INT:FUNC command to select a sine, square, upramp, dnramp or triangle modulating waveshape. For internal sources only.

Set Modulating

Frequency

5. Set the modulating frequency using the

SOURce[1|2]: AM:INT:FREQ command. For internal sources only.

Set Modulation

Depth

6. Set the modulation depth using the

SOURce[1|2]: AM:DEPT command.

289

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

SOURce[1|2]:AM:STATe

Source Specific

Command

Description

Note

Syntax

Example

Query Syntax

Return Parameter 0

1

Example

Sets or disables AM modulation for the selected channel. By default AM modulation is disabled.

AM modulation must be enabled before setting other parameters.

Burst or sweep mode will be disabled if AM modulation is enabled on the same channel. As only one modulation is allowed on a channel at any one time, other modulation modes will be disabled when AM modulation is enabled.

SOURce[1|2]:AM:STATe {OFF|ON}

SOUR1:AM:STAT ON

Enables AM modulation.

SOURce[1|2]:AM:STATe?

Disabled (OFF)

Enabled (ON)

SOUR1:AM:STAT?

1

AM modulation mode is currently enabled.

SOURce[1|2]:AM:MODulation:INPut

Description

Note

Source Specific

Command

Sets or queries the modulation source as internal or external for the selected channel. Internal is the default modulation source.



290


Syntax

Example

SOURce[1|2]:AM:MODulation:INPut

{INTernal|EXTernal}

SOUR1:AM:MOD:INP EXT

Sets the modulation source to external.

SOURce[1|2]:AM:MODulation:INPut? Query Syntax

Return Parameter INT

EXT

Internal

External

Example SOUR1:AM:MOD:INP?

INT

The modulation source is set to internal.

SOURce[1|2]:AM:INTernal:FUNCtion

Description

Source Specific

Command

Sets the shape of the modulating waveform from sine, square, triangle, upramp and dnramp for the selected channel. The default shape is sine.

Note Square and triangle waveforms have a 50% duty cycle. Upramp and dnramp have a symmetry of

100% and 0%, respectively.

Syntax

Example

Query Syntax

SOURce[1|2]:AM:INTernal:FUNCtion

{SINusoid|SQUare|TRIangle|UPRamp|DNRamp}

SOUR1:AM:INT:FUNC SIN

Sets the AM modulating wave shape to sine.

SOURce[1|2]:AM:INTernal:FUNCtion?

Return Parameter SIN Sine UPRAMP Upramp

Example

SQU

TRI

Square

Triangle

DNRAMP Dnramp

SOUR1:AM:INT:FUNC?

SIN

The shape for the modulating waveform is Sine.

291

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

SOURce[1|2]:AM:INTernal:FREQuency

Source Specific

Command

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Example

Query Syntax

Sets the frequency of the internal modulating waveform only for the selected channel. The default frequency is 100Hz.

SOURce[1|2]:AM:INTernal:FREQuency


<frequency> 2mHz~ 20kHz

SOUR1:AM:INT:FREQ +1.0000E+02

Sets the modulating frequency to 100Hz.

SOURce[1|2]:AM:INTernal:FREQuency?

[MINimum|MAXimum]


Example

Returns the frequency in

Hz.

SOUR1:AM:INT:FREQ? MIN

+1.0000E+02

Returns the minimum frequency allowed.

SOURce[1|2]:AM:DEPTh

Description

Note

Source Specific

Command

Sets or queries the modulation depth for internal sources only for the selected channel. The default is 100%.

The function generator will not output more than

±5V, regardless of the modulation depth.

The modulation depth of an external source is controlled using the ±5V MOD INPUT terminal on the rear panel, and not the SOURce[1]:AM:DEPTh command.

Syntax

Parameter

SOURce[1|2]:AM:DEPTh {<depth in percent>

|MINimum|MAXimum}

<depth in percent> 0~120%

292


Example

Query Syntax

SOUR1:AM:DEPT 50

Sets the modulation depth to 50%.

SOURce[1|2]:AM:DEPTh? [MINimum|MAXimum]


Example

Return the modulation depth as a percentage.

SOUR1:AM:DEPT?

+1.0000E+02

The modulation depth is 100%.

293

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Frequency Modulation (FM) Commands

FM Overview

The following is an overview of the steps required to generate an

FM waveform.

Enable FM

Modulation

1. Turn on FM modulation using the

SOURce[1|2]: FM:STAT ON command.

Configure Carrier 2. Use the APPLy command to select a carrier waveform. Alternatively, the FREQ, AMPl, and

DCOffs commands can be used to create a carrier waveform with a designated frequency, amplitude and offset.

Select

Modulation

Source

3. Select an internal or external modulation source using the SOURce[1|2]:FM:MOD:INP command.

Select shape 4. Use the SOURce[1|2]:FM:INT:FUNC command to select a sine, square, upramp, dnramp or triangle modulating waveshape. For internal sources only.

Set Modulating

Frequency


SOURce[1|2]: FM:INT:FREQ command. For internal sources only.

Set Peak

Frequency

Deviation

6. Use the SOURce[1|2]:FM:DEV command to set the frequency deviation.

294


SOURce[1|2]:FM:STATe

Description

Note

Source Specific

Command

Sets or disables FM modulation for the selected channel. By default FM modulation is disabled.

FM modulation must be enabled before setting other parameters.

Burst or sweep mode will be disabled if FM modulation is enabled on the same channel. As only one modulation is allowed at any one time on the same channel, other modulation modes will be disabled when FM modulation is enabled.

Syntax

Example

Query Syntax

SOUR[1|2]:FM:STATe {OFF|ON}

SOUR1:FM:STAT ON

Enables FM modulation.

SOURce[1|2]:FM:STATe?

Return Parameter 0

1

Example

Disabled (OFF)

Enabled (ON)

SOUR1:FM:STAT?

1

FM modulation mode is currently enabled.

SOURce[1|2]:FM:MODulation:INPut

Description

Source Specific

Command


Note If an external modulation source is selected, modulation depth is limited to ± 5V from the MOD


295

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Syntax

Example

SOURce[1|2]:FM:MODulation:INPut

{INTernal|EXTernal}

SOUR1:FM:MOD:INP EXT


SOURce[1|2]:FM:MODulation:INPut?

Query Syntax


EXT

Internal

External

Example SOUR1:FM:MOD:INP?

INT


SOURce[1|2]:FM:INTernal:FUNCtion

Description

Source Specific

Command




Syntax

Example

Query Syntax

SOURce[1|2]:FM:INTernal:FUNCtion


SOUR1:FM:INT:FUNC SIN

Sets the FM modulating wave shape to sine.

SOURce[1|2]:FM:INTernal:FUNCtion?


Example

SQU

TRI

Square

Triangle

DNRAMP Dnramp

SOUR1:FM:INT:FUNC?

SIN


296


SOURce[1|2]:FM:INTernal:FREQuency

Source Specific

Command

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Example

Query Syntax

Sets the frequency of the internal modulating waveform only for the selected channel. The default frequency is 10Hz.

SOURce[1|2]:FM:INTernal:FREQuency



SOUR1:FM:INT:FREQ +1.0000E+02


SOURce[1|2]:FM:INTernal:FREQuency?

[MINimum|MAXimum]


Example


Hz.

SOUR1:FM:INT:FREQ? MAX

+2.0000E+04

Returns the maximum frequency allowed.

SOURce[1|2]:FM:DEViation

Description

Source Specific

Command

Sets or queries the peak frequency deviation of the modulating waveform from the carrier waveform for the selected channel. The default peak deviation is 100Hz.

The frequency deviation of external sources is controlled using the ±5V MOD INPUT terminal on the rear panel. A positive signal (>0~+5V) will increase the deviation (up to the set frequency deviation), whilst a negative voltage will reduce the deviation.

Note The relationship of peak deviation to modulating frequency and carrier frequency is shown below.

Peak deviation = modulated frequency maximum–

297

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Syntax

Parameter

Example

Query Syntax

SOURce[1|2]:FM:DEViation {<peak deviation in

Hz>|MINimum|MAXimum}

<peak deviation in Hz> DC~30MHz

(20MHz AFG-3021/3022)

DC~1MHz (Ramp)

SOUR1:FM:DEV MAX

Sets the frequency deviation to the maximum value allowed.

SOURce[1|2]:FM:DEViation? [MINimum|MAXimum]

Return Parameter <NR3> Returns the frequency deviation in Hz.

Example carrier frequency.

The carrier frequency must be greater than or equal to the peak deviation frequency. The sum of the deviation and carrier frequency must not exceed the maximum frequency for a specific carrier shape. If an out of range deviation is set for any of the above conditions, the deviation will be automatically adjusted to the maximum value allowed and an “out of range” error will be generated.

For square wave carrier waveforms, the deviation may cause the duty cycle frequency boundary to be exceeded. In these conditions the duty cycle will be adjusted to the maximum allowed and a

“settings conflict” error will be generated.

SOURce1:FM:DEViation? MAX

+2.0000E+04

The maximum frequency deviation for the current function is 20MHz.

298


Frequency-Shift Keying (FSK) Commands

FSK Overview

The following is an overview of the steps required to generate an

FSK modulated waveform.

Enable FSK

Modulation

1. Turn on FSK modulation using the

SOURce[1|2]: FSK:STAT ON command.

Configure Carrier

2. Use the APPLy command to select a carrier waveform. Alternatively, the FREQ, AMPl, and


Select FSK Source

3. Select an internal or external modulation source using the SOURce[1|2]:FSK:MOD:INP command.

Select FSK HOP

Frequency

4. Set the hop frequency using the

SOURce[1|2]:FSK:FREQ command.

Set FSK Rate

5. Use the SOURce[1|2]: FSK:INT:RATE command to set the FSK rate. The FSK rate can only be set for internal sources.

SOURce[1|2]:FSKey:STATe

Description

Note

Source Specific

Command

Turns FSK Modulation on or off for the selected channel. By default FSK modulation is off.

Burst or sweep mode will be disabled if FSK modulation is enabled on the same channel. As only one modulation is allowed at any one time on the same channel, other modulation modes will be disabled when FSK modulation is enabled.

299

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Syntax

Example

Query Syntax

SOURce[1|2]:FSKey:STATe {OFF|ON}

SOUR1:FSK:STAT ON

Enables FSK modulation

SOURce[1|2]:FSKey:STATe?

Return Parameter 0

1

Example

Disabled (OFF)

Enabled (ON)

SOUR1:FSK:STAT?

ON

FSK modulation is currently enabled.

SOURce[1|2]:FSKey:MODulation:INPut

Source Specific

Command

Description

Note

Sets or queries the FSK source as internal or external for the selected channel. Internal is the default source.

If an external FSK source is selected, FSK rate is controlled by the Trigger INPUT terminal on the rear panel.

Syntax

Example

SOURce[1|2]:FSKey:MODulation:INPut

{INTernal|EXTernal}

SOUR1:FSK:MOD:INP EXT

Sets the FSK source to external.

Query Syntax SOURce[1|2]:FSKey:MOD:INP?

Return Parameter INT Internal

Example

EXT External

SOUR1:FSK:MOD:INP?

INT

The FSK source is set to internal.

300


SOURce[1|2]:FSKey:FREQuency

Description

Note

Syntax

Parameter

Example

Query Syntax

Source Specific

Command

Sets the FSK hop frequency. The default hop frequency is set to 100Hz.

For FSK, the modulating waveform is a square wave with a duty cycle of 50%.

SOURce[1|2]:FSKey:FREQuency



(20MHZ AFG-3021/3022)

SOUR1:FSK:FREQ +1.0000E+02

Sets the FSK hop frequency to 100Hz.

SOURce[1|2]:FSKey:FREQuency?

[MINimum|MAXimum]


Example


Hz.

SOUR1:FSK:FREQ? MAX

+8.0000E+07

Returns the maximum hop frequency allowed.

SOURce[1|2]:FSKey:INTernal:RATE

Source Specific

Command

Description

Note

Syntax

Parameter

Example

Sets or queries the FSK rate for internal sources only.

External sources will ignore this command.

SOURce[1|2]:FSKey:INTernal:RATE {<rate in Hz>

|MINimum|MAXimum}

<rate in Hz> 2 mHz~1MHz

SOUR1:FSK:INT:RATE MAX

Sets the rate to the maximum (1MHz).

301

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Query Syntax SOURce[1|2]:FSKey:INTernal:RATE?

[MINimum|MAXimum]

Return Parameter <NR3> Returns the FSK rate in

Hz.

Example SOUR1:FSK:INT:RATE? MAX

+1.0000E+05

Returns the maximum FSK rate allowed.

302


Phase Modulation (PM) Commands

PM Overview

The following is an overview of the steps required to generate a PM waveform.

Enable PM

Modulation

1. Turn on PM modulation using the

SOURce[1|2]:PM:STAT ON command.



Select shape 3. Use the SOURce[1|2]:PM:INT:FUNC command to select a sine, square, upramp, dnramp or triangle modulating waveshape.

Set PM

Frequency

Set Peak Phase

Deviation

4. Set the phase modulating frequency using the

SOURce[1|2]:PM:INT:FREQ command.

5. Use the SOURce[1|2]:PM:DEV command to set the phase deviation.

303

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

SOURce[1|2]:PM:STATe

Description

Note

Source Specific

Command

Sets or disables PM modulation for the selected channel. By default PM modulation is disabled.

PM modulation must be enabled before setting other parameters.

Burst or sweep mode will be disabled if PM modulation is enabled on the same channel. As only one modulation is allowed at any one time on the same channel, other modulation modes will be disabled when PM modulation is enabled.

Syntax

Example

Query Syntax

SOUR[1|2]:PM:STATe {OFF|ON}

SOUR1:PM:STAT ON

Enables PM modulation.

SOURce[1|2]:PM:STATe?

Return Parameter 0

1

Example

Disabled (OFF)

Enabled (ON)

SOUR1:PM:STAT?

1

PM modulation mode is currently enabled.

SOURce[1|2]:PM:INTernal:FUNCtion

Description

Source Specific

Command




Syntax

Example

SOURce[1|2]:PM:INTernal:FUNCtion


SOUR1:PM:INT:FUNC SIN

304


Query Syntax

Sets the PM modulating wave shape to sine.

SOURce[1|2]:PM:INTernal:FUNCtion?


SQU

TRI

Square

Triangle

DNRAMP Dnramp

Example SOUR1:PM:INT:FUNC?

SIN


SOURce[1|2]:PM:INTernal:FREQuency

Description

Source Specific

Command

Sets the phase modulation frequency for the selected channel. The default frequency is 100Hz.

Syntax

Parameter

Example

SOURce[1|2]:PM:INTernal:FREQuency



SOUR1:PM:INT:FREQ +1.0000E+02

Sets the phase modulation frequency to 100Hz.

Query Syntax SOURce[1|2]:PM:INTernal:FREQuency?

[MINimum|MAXimum]

Return Parameter <NR3> Returns the frequency in

Hz.

Example SOUR1:PM:INT:FREQ? MAX

+2.0000E+04


SOURce[1|2]:PM:DEViation

Description

Source Specific

Command

Sets or queries the peak phase deviation of the modulating waveform from the carrier waveform for the selected channel. The default peak deviation is 180.0°.

305

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Syntax

Parameter

SOURce[1|2]:PM:DEViation {<peak deviation in degrees>|MINimum|MAXimum}

<peak deviation in degrees>

SOUR1:PM:DEV MAX

0° ~ 360°

Example

Sets the phase deviation to 360°.

Query Syntax SOURce[1|2]:PM:DEViation? [MINimum|MAXimum]

Return Parameter <NR3> Returns the phase deviation in degrees.

Example SOURce1:PM:DEViation? MAX

+3.600E+02

The maximum phase deviation is 360°.

306


Additive Modulation (SUM) Commands

SUM Overview

The following is an overview of the steps required to generate a

SUM waveform.

Enable SUM

Modulation

1. Turn on SUM modulation using the

SOURce[1|2]:SUM:STATe ON command.



Select

Modulation

Source

3. Select an internal or external modulation source using the SOURce[1|2]:SUM:MOD:INP command.

Select shape 4. Use the SOURce[1|2]:SUM:INT:FUNCtion command to select a sine, square, upramp, dnramp or triangle modulating waveshape. For internal sources only.

Set SUM

Frequency

5. Set the SUM frequency using the

SOURce[1|2]:SUM:INT:FREQuency command.

For internal sources only.

Set the SUM

Amplitude

6. Use the SOURce[1|2]:SUM:AMP command to set the SUM amplitude.

307

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

SOURce[1|2]:SUM:STATe

Description

Note

Source Specific

Command

Sets or disables SUM modulation for the selected channel. By default SUM modulation is disabled.

SUM modulation must be enabled before setting other parameters.

Burst or sweep mode will be disabled if SUM modulation is enabled on the same channel. As only one modulation is allowed at any one time on the same channel, other modulation modes will be disabled when SUM modulation is enabled.

Syntax

Example

Query Syntax

SOUR[1|2]:SUM:STATe {OFF|ON}

SOUR1:SUM:STAT ON

Enables SUM modulation.

SOURce[1|2]:SUM:STATe?

Return Parameter 0

1

Example

Disabled (OFF)

Enabled (ON)

SOUR1:SUM:STAT?

1

SUM modulation mode is currently enabled.

SOURce[1|2]:SUM:MODulation:INPut

Description

Note

Source Specific

Command


If an external modulation source is selected, the

SUM amplitude is limited to ± 5V from the MOD

INPUT terminal on the rear panel. For example, if

SUM amplitude is set to 100%, then the maximum amplitude is +5V, and the minimum amplitude is -

5V.

308


Syntax

Example

SOURce[1|2]:SUM:MODulation:INPut

{INTernal|EXTernal}

SOUR1:SUM:MOD:INP EXT


SOURce[1|2]:SUM:MODulation:INPut?

Query Syntax


EXT

Internal

External

Example SOUR1:SUM:MOD:INP?

INT


SOURce[1|2]:SUM:INTernal:FUNCtion

Description

Source Specific

Command




Syntax

Example

Query Syntax

SOURce[1|2]:SUM:INTernal:FUNCtion


SOUR1:SUM:INT:FUNC SIN

Sets the SUM modulating wave shape to sine.

SOURce[1|2]:SUM:INTernal:FUNCtion?


Example

SQU

TRI

Square

Triangle

DNRAMP Dnramp

SOUR1:SUM:INT:FUNC?

SIN


309

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

SOURce[1|2]:SUM:INTernal:FREQuency

Description

Source Specific

Command

Sets the frequency (SUM frequency) of the internal modulating waveform for the selected channel.

The default frequency is 10Hz.

Syntax

Parameter

Example

Query Syntax

SOURce[1|2]:SUM:INTernal:FREQuency



SOUR1:SUM:INT:FREQ +1.0000E+02


SOURce[1|2]:SUM:INTernal:FREQuency?

[MINimum|MAXimum]


Example


Hz.

SOUR1:SUM:INT:FREQ? MAX

+2.0000E+04


SOURce[1|2]:SUM:AMPLitude

Source Specific

Command

Description The SUM amplitude command sets or queries the amplitude of the modulating waveform as a percentage of the carrier amplitude.

Syntax

Parameter

SOURce[1|2]:SUM:AMPLitude {<amplitude percent>|MINimum|MAXimum}

<amplitude percent> 0% ~ 100%

Example

Query Syntax

SOUR1:SUM:AMPL MAX

Sets the SUM amplitude to 100%.

SOURce[1|2]:SUM:AMPLitude?

Return Parameter <NR3> Returns the amplitude in %.

310

Example SOUR1:SUM:AMPL?

+1.0000E+02

The SUM amplitude is 100%.


311

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Commands

PWM Overview

The following is an overview of the steps required to generate a

PWM modulated waveform.

Enable PWM

Modulation

1. Turn on PWM modulation using the

SOURce[1|2]: PWM:STATe ON command.

Configure Carrier 2. Use the APPLy command to select a pulse waveform. Alternatively, the FREQ, AMPl, and

DCOffs commands can be used to create a pulse waveform with a designated frequency, amplitude and offset.

Select

Modulation

Source

3. Select an internal or external modulation source using the SOURce[1|2]:PWM:MOD:INP command.

Select Shape 4. Use the SOURce[1|2]: PWM:INT:FUNC command to select a sine, square, upramp, dnramp or triangle modulating waveshape. For internal sources only.

Select

Modulating

Frequency


SOURce[1|2]:PWM:INT:FREQ command. For internal sources only.

Set Duty

Cycle/Pulse

Width

6. Use the SOURce[1|2]:PWM:DUTY command to set the duty cycle or Pulse Width.

312


SOURce[1|2]:PWM:STATe

Source Specific

Command

Description

Note

Syntax

Example

Query Syntax

Turns FSK Modulation on or off. By default FSK modulation is off.

Burst or sweep mode will be disabled if PWM modulation is enabled on the same channel. As only one modulation is allowed at any one time, other modulation modes will be disabled when

FSK modulation is enabled on the same channel.

SOURce[1|2]:PWM:STATe {OFF|ON}

SOUR1:PWM:STAT ON

Enables PWM modulation

SOURce[1|2]:PWM:STATe?

Return Parameter 0 Disabled (OFF)

Example

1 Enabled (ON)

SOUR1:PWM:STAT?

ON

FSK modulation is currently enabled.

SOURce[1|2]:PWM:MODulation:INPut

Source Specific

Command

Description

Note

Syntax

Example

Query Syntax

Sets or queries the PWM source as internal or external. Internal is the default source.

If an external PWM source is selected, the duty cycle/pulse width is controlled by the MOD

INPUT terminal on the rear panel.

SOURce[1|2]:PWM:MODulation:INPut

{INTernal|EXTernal}

SOUR1:PWM:MOD:INP EXT

Sets the PWM source to external.

SOURce[1|2]:PWM:MODulation:INPut?

313

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual


EXT

Example

Internal

External

SOUR1:PWM:MOD:INP?

INT

The PWM source is set to internal.

SOURce[1|2]:PWM:INTernal:FUNction

Source Specific

Command

Description

Note

Sets the shape of the modulating waveform from sine, square, triangle, upramp and dnramp. The default shape is sine.

Square and triangle waveforms have a 50% duty cycle. Upramp and dnramp have a symmetry to


Carrier must be a pulse or PWM waveform.

Syntax

Example

Query Syntax

SOURce[1|2]:PWM:INTernal:FUNction


SOUR1:PWM:INT:FUN SIN

Sets the PWM modulating wave shape to sine. .

SOURce[1|2]:PWM:INTernal:FUNction?


Example

SQU

TRI

Square

Triangle

DNRAMP Dnramp

SOUR1:PWM:INT:FUNC?

SIN


SOURce[1|2]:PWM:INTernal:FREQuency

Source Specific

Command

Description Sets the modulating waveform frequency for internal sources. The default frequency is set to

10Hz.

314


Syntax

Parameter

Example

Query Syntax

<frequency> 2 mHz~ 20 kHz

SOUR1:PWM:INT:FREQ MAX

Sets the frequency to the maximum value.

SOURce[1|2]:PWM:INTernal:FREQuency?

Return Parameter <NR3> Returns the frequency in

Hz.

Example

SOURce[1|2]:PWM:INTernal:FREQuency


SOUR1:PWM:INT:FREQ? MAX

+2.0000E+04

Returns the modulating frequency. (20kHz)

SOURce[1|2]:PWM:DUTY

Description

Note

Source Specific

Command

Sets or queries the duty cycle deviation. The default duty cycle is 50%.

The duty cycle is limited by period, edge time and minimum pulse width.

The duty cycle deviation of an external source is controlled using the ±5V MOD INPUT terminal on the rear panel. A positive signal (>0~+5V) will increase the deviation (up to the set duty cycle deviation), whilst a negative voltage will reduce the deviation.

Syntax

Parameter

SOURce[1|2]:PWM:DUTY {< percent>|minimum

|maximum}

<percent> 0%~100% (limited, see above)

Example SOUR1:PWM:DUTY +3.0000E+01

Sets the duty cycle to 30%.

Query Syntax SOURce[1|2]:PWM:DUTY?

Return Parameter <NR3> Returns the dutyin %.

315

Example

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

SOUR1:PWM:DUTY?

+3.0000E+01

The current duty cycle is 30%.

316


Frequency Sweep Commands

Sweep Overview

Below shows the order in which commands must be executed to perform a sweep.

Enable Sweep

Mode

Select waveform shape, amplitude and offset

1. Turn on Sweep mode modulation using the

SOURce[1|2]: SWE:STAT ON command.

2. Use the APPLy command to select the waveform shape. Alternatively, the FREQ,

AMPl, and DCOffs commands can be used to create a waveform with a designated frequency, amplitude and offset.

Select Sweep

Boundaries

3. Set the frequency boundaries by setting start and stop frequencies or by setting a center frequency with a span.

Start~Stop Use the

SOURce[1|2]:SWE:FREQ:STAR and SOURce[1|2]:SWE:FREQ:

STOP to set the start and stop frequencies. To sweep up or down, set the stop frequency higher or lower than the start frequency.

Span Use the SOURce[1|2]:SWE:FREQ:

CENT and SOURce[1|2]:SWE:

FREQ:SPAN commands to set the center frequency and the frequency span. To sweep up or down, set the span as positive or negative.

317

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Select Sweep

Mode

Select Sweep

Time

Select the sweep trigger source

5. Choose the sweep time using the

SOURce[1|2]:SWE:TIME command.

6. Select an internal or external sweep trigger source using the SOURce[1|2]:TRIG command.

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:STATe

Source Specific

Command

Description

Note

Sets or disables Sweep mode. By default Sweep is disabled.

Any modulation modes or Burst mode will be disabled if sweep mode is enabled on the same channel.

Syntax

Example

Query Syntax

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:STATe {OFF|ON}

SOUR1:SWE:STAT ON

Enables sweep mode.

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:STATe?

Return Parameter 0 Disabled (OFF)

Example

1 Enabled (ON)

SOUR1:SWE:STAT?

1

Sweep mode is currently enabled.

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:TYPE

Description

Source Specific

Command

Sets or queries the sweep type, frequency or amplitude sweep. By default, the sweep type is set to frequency.

Syntax SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:TYPE {FREQuency|AMPLitude}

318

4. Choose Linear or Logarithmic spacing using the SOURce[1|2]:SWE:FUNC command.


Example

Query Syntax

Example

SOUR1:SWE:TYPE FREQ

Sets sweep mode to frequency.

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:TYPE?

Return Parameter FREQ

AMPL

SOUR1:SWE:TYPE?

FREQ

Sweep type is frequency.

Frequency sweep

Amplitude sweep

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:MODE

Source Specific

Command

Description

Syntax

Example

Query Syntax

Example

Sets or queries the sweep triggering mode. The triggering mode can be set to continuous or gate.

By default, the triggering mode is set to continuous.

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:MODE {CONTinuous|GATE}

SOUR1:SWE:MODE GATE

Sets triggering mode to gate.

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:MODE?

Return Parameter CONT

GATE

Continuous mode

Gated mode

SOUR1:SWE:MODE?

GATE

The sweep trigger mode is set to gate.

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:SHAPe

Description

Source Specific

Command

Sets or queries the sweep waveform shape. The sweep can be set to a sawtooth or a shuttlecocklike shape. By default, the shape is set to sawtooth.

Syntax SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:SHAPe{SAWtooth|TRIangle}

319

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Parameter SAW

TRI

Sawtooth shaped sweep

Triangle (shuttle cock) shaped sweep.

Example SOUR1:SWE:SHAPe SAW

Sets the sweep shape to sawtooth.

Query Syntax SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:SHAPe?

Return Parameter sawtooth Sawtooth shaped sweep

Example triangle Triangle (shuttle cock) shaped sweep.

SOUR1:SWE:SHAPe?

Sawtooth

The sweep shape is set as sawtooth.

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:MANual:TRIGger

Description

Source Specific

Command

Performs a manual trigger when the sweep trigger is set to manual for the selected channel.

Syntax

Example

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:MANual:TRIGger

SOUR1:SWE: MAN:TRIG

Performs a manual trigger.

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:FREQuency:STARt

Source Specific

Command

Description

Note

Syntax

Sets the start frequency of the sweep for the selected channel. 100Hz is the default start frequency.

To sweep up or down, set the stop frequency higher or lower than the start frequency.

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:FREQuency:STARt


320


Parameter

Example

<frequency> 1μHz~ 30MHz

(20MHz AFG-3021/3022)

1μHz~ 1MHz (Ramp,

Triangle)

SOUR1:SWE:FREQ:STAR +2.0000E+03

Sets the start frequency to 2kHz.

Query Syntax SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:FREQuency:STARt? [MINimum|

MAXimum]

Return Parameter <NR3> Returns the start frequency in Hz.

Example SOUR1:SWE:FREQ:STAR? MAX

+3.0000E+07

Returns the maximum start frequency allowed.

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:FREQuency:STOP

Source Specific

Command

Description

Note

Syntax

Parameter

Example

Sets the stop frequency of the sweep for the selected channel. 1 kHz is the default start frequency.

To sweep up or down, set the stop frequency higher or lower than the start frequency.

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:FREQuency:STOP



(20MHz AFG-3021/3022)

1μHz~ 1MHz (Ramp,

Triangle)

SOUR1:SWE:FREQ:STOP +2.0000E+03

Sets the stop frequency to 2kHz.

Query Syntax SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:FREQuency:STOP? [MINimum|

MAXimum]

Return Parameter <NR3> Returns the stop frequency in Hz.

321

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Example SOUR1:SWE:FREQ:STOP? MAX

+3.0000E+07

Returns the maximum stop frequency allowed.

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:FREQuency:CENTer

Description

Note

Syntax

Parameter

Example

Source Specific

Command

Sets or queries the center frequency of the sweep for the selected channel. 550 Hz is the default center frequency.

The maximum center frequency depends on the sweep span and maximum frequency: max center freq = max freq – span/2

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:FREQuency:CENTer



(20MHz AFG-3021/3022)

1μHz~ 1MHz (Ramp)

SOUR1:SWE:FREQ:CENT +2.0000E+03

Sets the center frequency to 2kHz.

Query Syntax SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:FREQuency:CENTer?

[MINimum| MAXimum]

Return Parameter <NR3> Returns the center frequency in Hz.

Example SOUR1:SWE:FREQ:CENT? MAX

+3.0000E+07

Returns the maximum center frequency allowed, depending on the span.

322


SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:FREQuency:SPAN

Description

Source Specific

Command

Sets or queries the frequency span of the sweep for the selected channel. 900 Hz is the default frequency span. The span frequency is equal to the stop-start frequencies.

Note To sweep up or down, set the span as positive or negative.

The maximum span frequency has a relationship to the center frequency and maximum frequency: max freq span= 2(max freq – center freq)

Syntax

Parameter

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:FREQuency:SPAN



(20MHz AFG-3021/3022)

1μHz~ 1MHz (Ramp)

SOUR1:SWE:FREQ:SPAN +2.0000E+03

Sets the frequency span to 2kHz.

Example

Query Syntax SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:FREQuency:SPAN? [MINimum|

MAXimum]

Return Parameter <NR3> Returns the frequency span in Hz.

Example SOUR1:SWE:FREQ:SPAN?

+2.0000E+03

Returns the frequency span for the current sweep.

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:FUNCtion

Source Specific

Command

Description

Syntax

Sets linear or logarithmic sweep spacing. The default spacing is linear.

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:FUNCtion {LINear|LOG}

323

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Example

Query Syntax

Example

SOUR1:SWE:FUNC LIN

Sets the spacing to linear.

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:FUNCtion?

Return Parameter LIN

LOG

Linear spacing

Logarithmic spacing

SOUR1:SWE:FUNC?

LOG

The spacing is currently set as linear.

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:TIME

Description

Note

Source Specific

Command

Sets or queries the sweep time. The default sweep time is 1 second.

The function generator automatically determines the number of frequency points that are used for the sweep based on the sweep time.

Syntax

Parameter

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:TIME


<seconds> 1 ms ~ 500 s

Example

Query Syntax

SOUR1:SWE:TIME +1.0000E+00

Sets the sweep time to 1 second.

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:TIME? {[MINimum|MAXimum]}

Return Parameter <NR3> Returns sweep time in seconds.

Example SOUR1:SWE:TIME?

+2.0000E+01

Returns the sweep time (20 seconds).

324


SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:TRIGger

Description

Source Specific

Command

Sets or queries the trigger source as internal, external, manual or off for the selected channel.

Internal is the default trigger source. INTernal will constantly output a swept waveform at a defined interval time. EXTernal will output a swept waveform after each external trigger pulse.

Manual will ouput a swept waveform after the trigger softkey is pressed or the

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:MANual:TRIGger command is issued. The OFF setting is for continuous sweeping.

Note If the APPLy command was used to create the waveform shape, the source is automatically set to

INTernal.

The *OPC/*OPC? command/query can be used to signal the end of the sweep.

Syntax

Parameter

Example

Query Syntax

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:TRIGger {EXTernal|MANual|OFF|

INTernal,<seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum}

INTernal Internal trigger

EXTernal

MANual

OFF

<seconds>

External trigger

Manual trigger

No interval time, sweep continuously

1ms~ 500s. Interval time in seconds for the internal trigger.

MINimum

MAXimum

Sets the interval time to the minimum

Sets the interval time to the maximum

SOUR1:SWE:TRIG EXT

Sets the sweep source to external.

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:TRIGger?

325

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Return Parameter INT,<NR3>

Example

EXT

MAN

OFF

Internal trigger, interval time in seconds

External trigger

Manual trigger

Sweep continuously

SOUR1:SWE:TRIG?

INT +1.00000E+00

The sweep source is set to an interval time of 1 second.

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:AMPLitude:STARt

Source Specific

Command

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Example

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:AMPLitude:STARt

{<ampiltude>|MINimum|MAXimum}

<NR3> Sweep amplitude in volts.

(range:1mV~10V @50Ω)

SOUR1:SWE:AMPL:STAR MIN

Sets the start sweep to the minimum level

(1mVpp).

Query Syntax SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:AMPLitude:STARt?

{[MINimum|MAXimum]}

Return Parameter <NR3> Sweep amplitude in volts.

Example

Sets the start amplitude for when the sweep is set to the amplitude sweep type. By default the start amplitude is set to 1Vpp.

SOUR1:SWE:AMPL:STAR?

1.000E+00

The start amplitude is set to 1Vpp.

326


SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:AMPLitude:STOP

Source Specific

Command

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Example

Query Syntax

Sets the stop amplitude for when the sweep is set to the amplitude sweep type. By default the stop amplitude is set to 3Vpp.

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:AMPLitude:STOP

{<ampltude>|MINimum|MAXimum}

<NR3> Sweep amplitude in volts.

(range:1mV~10V @50Ω)

SOUR1:SWE:AMPL:STOP 3

Sets the stop sweep to 3Vpp).

SOURce[1|2]:SWEep:AMPLitude:STOP?

{[MINimum|MAXimum]}


Example

Sweep amplitude in volts.

SOUR1:SWE:AMPL:STOP?

3.000E+00

The stop amplitude is set to 3Vpp.

327

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Burst Mode Commands

Burst Mode Overview

Burst mode can be configured to use an internal trigger (N Cycle mode) or an external trigger (Gate mode) using the Trigger INPUT terminal on the rear panel. Using N Cycle mode, each time the function generator receives a trigger, the function generator will output a specified number of waveform cycles (burst). After the burst, the function generator will wait for the next trigger before outputting another burst. N Cycle is the default Burst mode.

The alternative to using a specified number of cycles, Gate mode uses the external trigger to turn on or off the output. When the

Trigger INPUT signal is high*, waveforms are continuously output

(creating a burst). When the Trigger INPUT signal goes low*, the waveforms will stop being output after the last waveform completes its period. The voltage level of the output will remain equal to the starting phase of the burst waveforms, ready for the signal to go high* again.

*assuming the Trigger polarity is not inverted.

Only one burst mode can be used at any one time. The burst mode depends on the source of the trigger (internal, external, manual) and the source of the burst.

Function

Burst Mode & Source

Gated pulse - IMMediate

N Cycle*

Triggered – IMMediate Available

Triggered - EXTernal, MANual Available

Cycle

Available

Unused

Unused

*burst count

Unused

Phase

Available

Available

Available

328


The following is an overview of the steps required to generate a burst waveform.

Enable Burst

Mode

1. Turn on Burst mode using the

SOURce[1|2]:BURS:STAT ON command.

Configuration 2. Use the APPLy command to select a sine, square, ramp, pulse or triangle burst waveform*. Alternatively, the FREQ, AMPl, and DCOffs commands can be used to create the burst waveform* with a designated frequency, amplitude and offset.

Choose

Triggered/Gated

Mode

Set Burst Count

*2 mHz minimum for internally triggered bursts.

3. Use the SOURce[1|2]:BURS:MODE command to select from triggered or gated burst modes.

4. Use the SOURce[1|2]:BURS:NCYC command to set the burst count. This command is only for triggered burst mode only.

Set the burst period

5. Use the SOURce[1|2]:BURS:INT:PER command to set the burst period/cycle. This command is only applicable for triggered burst mode (internal trigger).

Set Burst Starting

Phase

Select the trigger

6. Use the SOURce[1|2]:BURS:PHAS command to set the burst starting phase.

7. Use the SOURce[1|2]:BURS:TRIG command to select the trigger source for triggered burst mode only. For manual triggering, execute the

SOUR[1]:BURSt:TRIGger:MANual for each trigger.

329

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:STATe

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Description

Note

Syntax

Parameter

Turns burst mode on or off for the selected channel. By default burst mode is turned off.

When burst mode is turned on, sweep and any modulation modes are disabled on the same channel.

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:STATe {OFF|ON}

OFF Disabled

Example

Query Syntax

Return Parameter 0

1

ON Enabled

SOUR1:BURS:STAT OFF

Turns burst mode on.

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:STATe?

Disabled

Enabled

Example SOUR1:BURS:STAT?

OFF

Burst mode is off.

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:MODE

Source Specific

Command

Description

Note

Sets or queries the burst mode as gated or triggered. The default burst mode is triggered.

The burst count, period, trigger source and any manual trigger commands are ignored in gated burst mode.

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:MODE {TRIGgered|GATE}

TRIGgered Triggered mode

GATE Gated mode

330


Example SOUR1:BURS:MODE TRIG

Sets the burst mode to triggered.

Query Syntax SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:MODE?

Return Parameter TRIG Triggered mode

Example

GATE Gated mode

SOUR1:BURS:MODE?

TRIG

The current burst mode is triggered.

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:NCYCles

Description

Note

Source Specific

Command

Sets or queries the number of cycles (burst count) in triggered burst mode for the selected channel.

The default number of cycles is 1. The burst count is ignored in gated mode.

If the trigger source is set to immediate, the product of the burst period and waveform frequency must be greater than the burst count:

Burst Period X Waveform frequency > burst count

If the burst count is too large, the burst period will automatically be increased and a “Settings conflict” error will be generated.

Only sine and square waves are allowed infinite burst above 25 MHz(not applicable for AFG-

3021/3022).

Syntax

Parameter

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:NCYCles{<cycles>

|INFinity|MINimum |MAXimum}

<cycles>

INFinity

1~1,000,000 cycles.

Sets the number to continuous.

MINimum Sets the number to minimum allowed.

MAXimum Sets the number to maximum allowed.

331

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Example

Query Syntax

SOUR1:BURS:NCYC INF

Sets the number of burst cycles to continuous

(infinite).

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:NCYCles? [MINimum|MAXimum]

Return Parameter <NR3> Returns the number of cycles.

Example

INF INF is returned if the number of cycles is continuous.

SOUR1:BURS:NCYC?

+1.0000E+02

The burst cycles are set to 100.

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:INTernal:PERiod

Description

Note

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Sets or queries the burst period for the selected channel. Burst period settings are only applicable when the trigger is set to immediate. The default burst period is 10ms.

During manual triggering, external triggering or

Gate burst mode, the burst period settings are ignored.

The burst period must be long enough to output the designated number of cycles for a selected frequency.

Burst period > burst count/(waveform frequency

+ 200 ns)

If the period is too short, it is automatically increased so that a burst can be continuously output. A “data out of range” error will also be generated.

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:INTernal:PERiod


<seconds > 1 us ~ 500 seconds

332


Example SOUR1:BURS:INT:PER +1.0000E+01

Sets the period to 10 seconds.

Query Syntax SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:INTernal:PERiod?

[MINimum|MAXimum]

Return Parameter <NR3> Returns the burst period in seconds.

Example SOUR1:BURS:INT:PER?

+1.0000E+01

The burst period is 10 seconds.

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:PHASe

Description

Source Specific

Command

Sets or queries the starting phase for the burst for the selected channel. The default phase is 0 degrees. At 0 degrees, sine, square and ramp waveforms are at 0 volts.

In gated burst mode, waveforms are continuously output (burst) when the Trig signal is true. The voltage level at the starting phase is used to determine the voltage level of the signal inbetween bursts.

Note The phase command is not used with pulse waveforms.

Syntax

Parameter

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:PHASe

{<angle>|MINimum|MAXimum}

<angle> -360 ~ 360 degrees

Example SOUR1:BURS:PHAS MAX

Sets the phase to 360 degrees.

Query Syntax SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:PHASe? [MINimum|MAXimum]

Return Parameter <NR3> Returns the phase angle in degrees.

Example SOUR1:BURS:PHAS?

+1.2000E+01

The burst starting phase is 120 degrees.

333

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:MANual:TRIGger

Description

Source Specific

Command

This command is used to manually trigger a burst waveform when the source trigger is set to manual for the selected channel. This command is the equivalent of pressing the trigger soft-key on the front panel for manual triggering.

Syntax

Example

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:MANual:TRIGger

SOUR1:BURS:MAN:TRIG

Manually triggers the burst waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:TRIGger

Description

Source Specific

Command

Sets or queries the trigger source for triggered burst mode for the selected channel. In trigged burst mode, a waveform burst is output each time a trigger signal is received and the number of cycles is determined by the burst count.

There are three trigger sources for triggered burst mode:

Internal

External

A burst is output at a set frequency determined by the burst period.

EXTernal will output a burst waveform after each external trigger pulse. Any additional trigger pulse signals before the end of the burst are ignored.

Manual Manual triggering will output a burst waveform after the

SOUR[1]:BURSt:MANual:TRIGger command is executed or the trigger soft-key is pressed.

:I

334


Syntax

Example

Query Syntax

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:TRIGger

{INTernal|EXTernal|MANual}

SOUR1:BURS:TRIG:SOUR EXT

Sets the burst trigger source to external.

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:TRIGger?


EXT

Internal

External

Example

MANual Manual

SOUR1:BURS:TRIG?

INT

The burst trigger source is set to immediate.

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:TRIGger:DELay

Description

Source Specific

Command

The DELay command is used to insert a delay (in seconds) before a burst is output for the selected channel. The delay starts after a trigger is received.

The default delay is 0 seconds.

Syntax

Parameter

Example

Query Syntax

SOURce[1|2]: BURSt:TRIGger:DELay


<seconds> 0~100 seconds

SOUR1:BURS:TRIG:DEL +1.0000E+01

Sets the trigger delay to 10 seconds.

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:TRIGger:DELay?

[MINimum|MAXimum]

Return Parameter <NRf>

Example SOUR1:BURS:TRIG:DEL

+1.0000E+01

Delay in seconds

The trigger delay is 10 seconds.

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:TRIGger:SLOPe

Source Specific

Command

335

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Description

Syntax

Sets or queries the trigger edge for externally triggered bursts from the Trigger INPUT terminal on the rear panel for the selected channel. By default the trigger is rising edge (Positive).

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:TRIGger:SLOPe

{POSitive|NEGative}

POSitive rising edge Parameter

Example

Query Syntax

NEGative falling edge

SOUR1:BURS:TRIG:SLOP NEG

Sets the trigger slope to negative.

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:TRIGger:SLOPe?

Return Parameter POS

NEG

Example rising edge falling edge

SOUR1:BURS:TRIG:SLOP

NEG

The trigger slope is negative.

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:GATE:POLarity

Description

Source Specific

Command

In gated mode, for the selected channel, the function generator will output a waveform continuously while the external trigger receives logically true signal from the Trigger INPUT terminal. Normally a signal is logically true when it is high. The logical level can be inverted so that a low signal is considered true.

Syntax

Parameter

Example

SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:GATE:POLarity{NORMal|INVerte s}

NORMal Logically high

INVertes Logically low

SOUR1:BURS:GATE:POL INV

Sets the state to logically low (inverted).

336


Query Syntax SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:GATE:POLarity?

Return Parameter NORM Normal(High) logical level

Example

INV Inverted (low) logical level

SOUR1:BURS:GATE:POL?

INV

The true state is inverted(logically low).

337

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Arbitrary Waveform Commands

Arbitrary Waveform Overview

Use the steps below to output an arbitrary waveform over the remote interface.

Output Arbitrary

Waveform

1. Use the

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ARB_waveform command (Example:

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SQUare) to output the arbitrary waveform currently selected in memory.

Select Waveform

Frequency, amplitude and offset

Load Waveform

Data

2. Use the APPLy command to select frequency, amplitude and DC offset. Alternatively,

FREQ, FUNC, AMPl, and DCOffs commands can be used.

3. Waveform data (1 to 8388608 points per waveform) can be downloaded into volatile memory using the SOURce[1|2]:DATA:DAC command. Binary integer or decimal integer values in the range of ± 32767 can be used.

Set Waveform

Rate

4. The waveform rate is the product of the number of points in the waveform and the waveform frequency.

Rate = Hz × # points

Frequency: 1µHz ~ 125MHz µ

# points: 2~ 8,388,608

338


SOURce[1|2]:DATA:DAC

Description

Source Specific

Command

The SOURce[1|2]:DATA:DAC command is used to download binary or decimal integer values into memory using the IEEE-488.2 binary block format or as an ordered list of values.

Note 1 The integer values (±32767) correspond to the maximum and minimum peak amplitudes of the waveform. For instance, for a waveform with an amplitude of 5Vpp (0 offset), the value 32767is the equivalent of 2.5 Volts. If the integer values do not span the full output range, the peak amplitude will be limited. The IEEE-488.2 binary block format is comprised of three parts:

# 7 2097152

1. Initialization character (#)

1 2 3

2. Digit length (in ASCII) of the number of bytes

3. Number of bytes

Note 2

IEEE 488.2 uses two bytes to represent waveform data (16 bit integer). Therefore the number of bytes is always twice the number of data points.

The data sent by the command is limited to 1MB.

To overcome the 1MB limitation, use the <start> parameter to send data segments of 1MB or less.

Do not send the command before the last transmission has finished. An example will be shown below.

Syntax

Parameter

SOURce[1|2]:DATA:DAC VOLATILE, <start>，

{<binary block>|<value>, <value>, . . . }

<start> Start address of the arbitrary waveform

<binary block>

<value> Decimal or integer values

±32767

339

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Example1

Example2a

(0~1M data points)

Example2b

(1M~2M data points)

SOUR1:DATA:DAC VOLATILE, 0, #216 Binary Data

The command above downloads 8 data values

(stored in 16 bytes) using the binary block format.

SOUR1:DATA:DAC VOLATILE, 1000, 32767, 2048, 0, -

2048, -32767

Downloads the data values (32767, 2048, 0, -2048, -

32767) to address 1000.

SOUR1:DATA:DAC VOLATILE,0,#72097152 Binary

Data

This command will send that first 0~1M data points to address 0. To send data to the next 1M data points, see below:

SOUR1:DATA:DAC VOLATILE,1048576,#72097152

Binary Data

This command will send the next 1M data points

(1M~2M)

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:EDIT:COPY

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Example

Source Specific

Command

Copies a segment of a waveform to a specific starting address.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:EDIT:COPY

[<start>,<length>,<paste>]

<start>

<length>

Start address: 0~8388606

Length: 2~8388608

<paste> Paste address: 0~8388607

SOUR1:ARB:EDIT:COPY 1000, 256, 1257

Copies 256 data values starting at address 1000 and copies them to address 1257.

340


SOURce[1|2]:ARB:EDIT:DELete

Description

Source Specific

Command

Deletes a segment of a waveform from memory for the selected channel. The segment is defined by a starting address and length.

Note

Syntax

A waveform/waveform segment cannot be deleted when being output.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:EDIT:DELete [<STARt>,<LENGth>]

Parameter

Example

<STARt> Start address: 0~8388606

<LENGth> Length: 2~8388608

SOURce1:ARB:EDIT:DEL 1000, 256

Deletes a section of 256 data points from the waveform starting at address 1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:EDIT:DELete:ALL

Source Specific

Command

Description

Note

Syntax

Example

Deletes all user-defined waveforms from nonvolatile memory and the current waveform in volatile memory for the selected channel.

A waveform cannot be deleted when output.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:EDIT:DELete:ALL

SOUR1:ARB:EDIT:DEL:ALL

Deletes all user waveforms from memory.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:EDIT:POINt

Source Specific

Command

Description

Note

Syntax

Edit a point on the arbitrary waveform.

A waveform/waveform segment cannot be deleted when being output.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:EDIT:POINt [<address>,<data>]

341

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Parameter

Example

<address> Address of data point:

0~8388607

Value data: ± 32,767 <data>

SOUR1:ARB:EDIT:POIN 1000, 32767

Creates a point on the arbitrary waveform at address 1000 with the highest amplitude.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:EDIT:PROTect

Description

Source Specific

Command

Protects a segment of the arbitrary waveform from deletion/editing or returns the protection state and co-ordinates (if any).

Syntax

Parameter

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:EDIT:PROTect [<STARt>,<LENGth>]

<STARt> Start address: 0~8388606

Example

<LENGth> Length: 2~8388608

SOUR1:ARB:EDIT:PROT 40, 50

Protects a segment of the waveform from address

40 for 50 data points.

Query Syntax

Return Parameter

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:EDIT:PROTect?

“UnProtect”

“Protect Start:”<STARt>”

Protect

Length:”<LENGth>

Returns the string

“Unprotect” when protection is disabled.

Returns a string showing the start of the protection and the protection length.

Example SOUR1:ARB:EDIT:PROT?

Protect Start:0 Protect Length:10

Returns the protected segment of the ARB waveform.

342


SOURce[1|2]:ARB:EDIT:PROTect:ALL

Source Specific

Command

Description

Syntax

Example

Protects the arbitrary waveform currently in nonvolatile memory/ currently being output.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:EDIT:PROTect:ALL

SOUR1:ARB:EDIT:PROT:ALL

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:EDIT:UNProtect

Source Specific

Command

Description

Syntax

Example

Unprotects the arbitrary waveform currently in non-volatile memory/currently being output.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:EDIT:UNProtect

SOUR1:ARB:EDIT:UNP

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SINusoid

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Example

Source Specific

Command

Creates a sinusoid with a specified start address, length and scale for the selected channel.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SINusoid

[<STARt>,<LENGth>,<SCALe>]

<STARt>

<LENGth>

Start address*: 0~8388607

Length*: 1~8388608

<SCALe>

* Start + Length ≤ 8388608

Scale: 1~32767

SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:SIN 1000,1000,100

Creates a sin wave 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of 1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SQUare

Source Specific

Command

Description Creates a square wave with a specified start address, length and scale.

343

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Syntax

Parameter

Example

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SQUare


<STARt>

<LENGth>

<SCALe>


Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:SQU 1000,1000,100

Creates a square wave 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of 1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:PULSe

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Example

Source Specific

Command

Creates a pulse wave with a specified frequency and duty.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:PULSe

[{<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum},{<percent>|MI

Nimum|MAXimum}]

<frequency> Sets the pulse frequency

<percent>

*Frequency

1pHz~5Hz

>5Hz~50Hz

>50Hz~500Hz

>500Hz~5kHz

>5kHz~50kHz

Sets the duty of the pulse as a percentage

Resolution Duty Resolution

1pHz 0.0001%

1uHz

10uHz

100uHz

1mHz

0.0001%

0.001%

0.01%

0.1%

>50kHz~500kHz 10mHz 1%

SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:PULSe +1.00000002E+03,

+1.002E+01

Creates a 1000.0002 Hz pulse wave with a 10.02% duty cycle.

344


SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:RAMP

Description

Source Specific

Command

Creates a ramp wave with a specified start address, length and scale for the selected channel.

Syntax

Parameter

Example

SOURce[1]:ARB:BUILt:RAMP[<STARt>,<LENGth>

,<SCALe>]

<STARt>

<LENGth>


Length*: 1~8388608

<SCALe> Scale: 1~32767


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:RAMP 1000,1000,100

Creates a ramp wave 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of 1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SINC

Description

Source Specific

Command

Creates a sinc wave with a specified start address, length and scale.

Syntax

Parameter

Example

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SINC


<STARt>

<LENGth>


Length*: 1~8388608



SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:SINC 1000,1000,100

Creates a sinc wave 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of 1000.

345

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:EXPRise

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates an exponential rise wave with a specified start address, length and scale for the selected channel.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:EXPRise


<STARt> Start address*: 0~8388607

<LENGth> Length*: 1~8388608

Example

<SCALe>


Scale: 1~32767

SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:EXPR 1000,1000,100

Creates an exponential rise wave 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of

1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:EXPFall

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates an exponential fall wave with a specified start address, length and scale.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:EXPFall



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

Example


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:EXPF 1000,1000,100

Creates an exponential fall wave 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of

1000.

346


SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:DC

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Example

Source Specific

Command

Creates a DC waveform with a specified start address, length and scale.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:DC

[<STARt>,<LENGth>,<Data>]

<STARt>

<LENGth>


Length*: 1~8388608

<Data> Data: ± 32767


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:DC 1000,1000,100

Creates a DC waveform of 1000 points in length with a data of 100 and a start address of 1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:STAIR_UD

Description

Source Specific

Command

Creates an up & down staircase waveform (8 steps up, 8 steps down).

Syntax

Parameter

Example

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:STAIR_UD


<STARt>

<LENGth>


Length*: 1~8388608



SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:STAIR_UD 1000,1000,100

Creates an up & down staircase waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of 1000.

347

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:STAIR_DOWN

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates an 8-step down-staircase waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:STAIR_DOWN



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

Example


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:STAIR_DOWN 1000,1000,100

Creates a staircase waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of 1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:STAIR_UP

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Example

Source Specific

Command

Creates an 8-step up-staircase waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:STAIR_UP


<STARt>

<LENGth>


Length*: 1~8388608

<SCALe>


Scale: 1~32767

SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:STAIR_UP 1000,1000,100

Creates a staircase waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of 1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ABSATAN

Source Specific

Command

Description

Syntax

Creates an absolute atan waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ABSATAN


348


Parameter

Example

<STARt>

<LENGth>


Length*: 1~8388608

<SCALe>


Scale: 1~32767

SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:ABSATAN 1000,1000,100

Creates an absolute atan waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of

1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ABSSIN

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Example

Source Specific

Command

Creates an absolute sine waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ABSSIN


<STARt>

<LENGth>


Length*: 1~8388608



SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:ABSSIN 1000,1000,100

Creates an absolute sine waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of

1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ABSSINHALF

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates an absolute half sine waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ABSSINHALF


<STARt>

<LENGth>


Length*: 1~8388608

<SCALe>


Scale: 1~32767

349

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Example SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:ABSSINHALF 1000,1000,100

Creates an absolute sine half waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of

1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:AMPALT

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Example

Source Specific

Command

Creates an amplifying oscillation waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:AMPALT


<STARt>

<LENGth>

<SCALe>


Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:AMPALT 1000,1000,100

Creates an amplifying oscillating waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of 1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ATTALT

Description

Syntax

Source Specific

Command

Creates an attenuated oscillation waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ATTALT


<STARt> Start address*: 0~8388607 Parameter

Example

<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:ATTALT 1000,1000,100

Creates an attenuated oscillating waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of 1000.

350


SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:DIRIC_EVEN

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates an even Dirichlet kernel waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:DIRIC_EVEN



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

Example


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:DIRIC_EVEN 1000,1000,100

Creates an even diric waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of

1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:DIRIC_ODD

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates an odd diric waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:DIRIC_ODD



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

Example


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:DIRIC_ODD 1000,1000,100

Creates an odd Diric waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of

1000.

351

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:GAUSPULS

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Example

Source Specific

Command

Creates a Gaussian-modulated sinusoidal pulse waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:GAUSPULS


<STARt>

<LENGth>


Length*: 1~8388608



SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:GAUSPULS 1000,1000,100

Creates a Gaussian-pulse waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of

1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:HAVERCOSINE

Description

Syntax

Source Specific

Command

Creates a havercosine waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:HAVERCOSINE


<STARt>

<LENGth>


Length*: 1~8388608

Parameter

Example



SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:HAVERCOSINE 1000,1000,100

Creates a havercosine waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of

1000.

352


SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:HAVERSINE

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates a haversine waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:HAVERSINE



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

Example


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:HAVERSINE 1000,1000,100

Creates a haversine waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of

1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:N_PULSE

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates a negative pulse waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:N_PULSE



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

Example


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:N_PULSE 1000,1000,100

Creates a negative pulse waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of

1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:NEGRAMP

Source Specific

Command

Description Creates a negative ramp pulse waveform.

353

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Syntax

Parameter

Example

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:NEGRAMP


<STARt>

<LENGth>

<SCALe>


Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:NEGRAMP 1000,1000,100

Creates a negative ramp waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of

1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:RECTPULS

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates a rectangular pulse.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:RECTPULS



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

Example


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:RECTPULS 1000,1000,100

Creates a rectangular pulse waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of

1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ROUNDHALF

Source Specific

Command

Description

Syntax

Creates a positive half circle (y=sqrt(1-x 2 )).

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ROUNDHALF


354


Parameter

Example

<STARt>

<LENGth>


Length*: 1~8388608

<SCALe>


Scale: 1~32767

SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:ROUNDHALF 1000,1000,100

Creates a positive half circle waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of

1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SAWTOOTH

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Example

Source Specific

Command

Creates a sawtooth waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SAWTOOTH


<STARt>

<LENGth>


Length*: 1~8388608



SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:SAWTOOTH 1000,1000,100

Creates a sawtooth waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of 1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SINETRA

Description

Syntax

Source Specific

Command

Creates a piecewise sine wave.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SINETRA


<STARt> Start address*: 0~8388607 Parameter

<LENGth>

<SCALe>


Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

355

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Example SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:SINETRA 1000,1000,100

Creates a piecewise sine waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of

1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:STEPRESP

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Example

Source Specific

Command

Creates a Heaviside step function (step response).

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:STEPRESP


<STARt>

<LENGth>

<SCALe>


Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:STEPRESP 1000,1000,100

Creates a Heaviside sine waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of

1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SINEVER

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates piecewise sine wave (clipped to 0 at 0° to

90° and 180° to 270°).

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SINEVER


<STARt>

<LENGth>


Length*: 1~8388608

<SCALe>


Scale: 1~32767

356


Example SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:SINEVER 1000,1000,100

Creates a piecewise sine wave waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of 1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:TRAPEZIA

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Example

Source Specific

Command

Creates a trapezoid waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:TRAPEZIA


<STARt>

<LENGth>

<SCALe>


Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:TRAPEZIA 1000,1000,100

Creates trapezoid waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of 1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:TRIPULS

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates a triangular pulse waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:TRIPULS



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

Example


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:TRIPULS 1000,1000,100

Creates triangular pulse waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of

1000.

357

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:DLORENTZ

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Example

Source Specific

Command

Creates a derivative of the Lorentz function waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:DLORENTZ


<STARt>

<LENGth>


Length*: 1~8388608



SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:DLORENTZ 1000,1000,100

Creates a derivative of Lorentz function waveform

1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of 1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:GAUSS

Description

Syntax

Source Specific

Command

Creates a gauss bell curve waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:GAUSS


<STARt>

<LENGth>


Length*: 1~8388608

Parameter

Example



SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:GAUSS 1000,1000,100

Creates a gauss bell curve waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of

1000.

358


SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:LN

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates natural logarithm waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:LN



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

Example


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:LN 1000,1000,100

Creates a natural logarithm waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of

1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:LORENTZ

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates a Lorentz function waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:LORENTZ



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

Example


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:LORENTZ 1000,1000,100

Creates a Lorentz function waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of

1000.

359

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SINCE

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates a cardinal sine function waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SINCE



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

Example


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:SINCE 1000,1000,100

Creates a cardinal sine function waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of 1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SQRT

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates a square root function waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SQRT



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

Example


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:SQRT 1000,1000,100

Creates a square root function waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of 1000.

360


SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:XSQUARE

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates a quadratic (x 2 ) function waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:XSQUARE



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

Example


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:XSQUARE 1000,1000,100

Creates a quadratic function waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of

1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ARCCOS

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates an inverse cosine function waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ARCCOS



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

Example


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:ARCCOS 1000,1000,100

Creates an inverse cosine function waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of 1000.

361

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ARCCOT

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates an inverse cotangent function waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ARCCOT



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

Example


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:ARCCOT 1000,1000,100

Creates an inverse cotangent function waveform


SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ARCCSC

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates an inverse cosecant function waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ARCCSC



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

Example


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:ARCCSC 1000,1000,100

Creates an inverse cosecant function waveform


362


SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ARCSEC

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates an inverse secant function waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ARCSEC



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

Example


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:ARCSEC 1000,1000,100

Creates an inverse secant function waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of 1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ARCSIN

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates an inverse sine waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ARCSIN



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

Example


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:ARCSIN 1000,1000,100

Creates an inverse sine waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of

1000.

363

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ARCSINH

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates an inverse hyperbolic sine waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ARCSINH



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

Example


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:ARCSINH 1000,1000,100

Creates an inverse hyperbolic sine waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of 1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ARCTAN

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates an inverse tangent waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ARCTAN



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

Example


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:ARCTAN 1000,1000,100

Creates an inverse tangent waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of

1000.

364


SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ARCTANH

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates an inverse hyperbolic tangent waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:ARCTANH



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

Example


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:ARCTANH 1000,1000,100

Creates an inverse hyperbolic tangent waveform


SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:COSH

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates a hyperbolic cosine waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:COSH



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

Example


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:COSH 1000,1000,100

Creates a hyperbolic cosine waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of

1000.

365

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:COT

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates a cotangent waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:COT



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

Example


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:COT 1000,1000,100

Creates a cotangent waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of

1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:CSC

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates a cosecant waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:CSC



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

Example


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:CSC 1000,1000,100

Creates a cosecant waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of 1000.

366


SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SEC

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates a secant waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SEC



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

Example


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:SEC 1000,1000,100

Creates a secant waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of 1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SECH

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Example

Source Specific

Command

Creates a hyperbolic secant waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SECH


<STARt>

<LENGth>


Length*: 1~8388608

<SCALe>


Scale: 1~32767

SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:SECH 1000,1000,100

Creates a hyperbolic secant waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of

1000.

367

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SINH

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates a hyperbolic sine waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:SINH



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

Example


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:SINH 1000,1000,100

Creates a hyperbolic sine waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of

1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:TAN

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates a tangent waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:TAN



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

Example


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:TAN 1000,1000,100

Creates a tangent waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of 1000.

368


SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:TANH

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates a hyperbolic tangent waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:TANH



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

Example


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:TANH 1000,1000,100

Creates a hyperbolic tangent waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of 1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:BARTHANNWIN

Description

Syntax

Source Specific

Command

Creates a Bartlett-Hann window function waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:BARTHANNWIN


<STARt>

<LENGth>


Length*: 1~8388608

Parameter

Example



SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:BARTHANNWIN 1000,1000,100

Creates a Bartlett-Hann window function waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of 1000.

369

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:BARLETT

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates a Bartlett window function waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:BARLETT



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

Example


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:BARLETT 1000,1000,100

Creates a Bartlett window function waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of 1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:BLACKMAN

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Example

Source Specific

Command

Creates a Blackman window function waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:BLACKMAN


<STARt>

<LENGth>


Length*: 1~8388608

<SCALe>


Scale: 1~32767

SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:BLACKMAN 1000,1000,100

Creates a Blackman window function waveform


370


SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:BOHMANWIN

Description

Source Specific

Command

Creates a Bohmanwin window function waveform.

Syntax

Parameter

Example

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:BOHMANWIN



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:BOHMANWIN 1000,1000,100

Creates a Bohmanwin window function waveform


SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:CHEBWIN

Description

Source Specific

Command

Creates a Chebyshev window function waveform.

Syntax

Parameter

Example

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:CHEBWIN



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:CHEBWIN 1000,1000,100

Creates a Chebyshev window function waveform


371

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:FLATTOPWIN

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Example

Source Specific

Command

Creates a flat top weighted window function waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:FLATTOPWIN


<STARt>

<LENGth>


Length*: 1~8388608



SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:FLATTOPWIN 1000,1000,100

Creates a flat top weighted window function waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of 1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:HAMMING

Description

Syntax

Source Specific

Command

Creates a Hamming window function waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:HAMMING


<STARt>

<LENGth>


Length*: 1~8388608

Parameter

Example



SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:HAMMING 1000,1000,100

Creates a Hamming window function waveform


372


SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:HANN

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates a Hann window function waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:HANN



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

Example


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:HANN 1000,1000,100

Creates a Hann window function waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of 1000.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:KAISER

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates a Kaiser window function waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:KAISER



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

Example


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:KAISER 1000,1000,100

Creates a Kaiser window function waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of 1000.

373

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:TRIANG

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates a Triangle window function waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:TRIANG



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

Example


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:TRIANG 1000,1000,100

Creates a Triangle window function waveform


SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:TUKEYWIN

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Creates a Tukey window function waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:BUILt:TUKEYWIN



<LENGth>

<SCALe>

Length*: 1~8388608

Scale: 1~32767

Example


SOUR1:ARB:BUIL:TUKEYWIN 1000,1000,100

Creates a Tukey window function waveform 1000 points in length with a scale of 100 and a start address of 1000.

374


SOURce[1|2]:ARB:OUTPut

Source Specific

Command

Description

Syntax

Marks a section of the ARB waveform to be output.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:OUTPut [<STARt>,<LENGth>]

Parameter

Example

Query Syntax


<LENGth> Length*: 2~8388608

SOUR1:ARB:OUTP 100, 1000

Sets the ARB output section from point 100 to 1100.

SOUR1:ARB:OUTP?

Return Parameter Returns the following string:

Start:<STARt>,Length:<LENGth>

<STARt> 0~8388606

<LENGth> 2~8388608

Example SOUR1:ARB:OUTP?

0, 1024

The output section starts at 0 and ends at 1024.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:RATE

Source Specific

Command

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Example

Query Syntax

Sets or queries the sample rate of the ARB waveform.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:RATE


<frequency> Sets the sample rate frequency in Hz.

MINimum 1 μ Hz

MAXimum 250MHz

SOUR1:ARB:RATE 20000

Sets the ARB rate to 20kHz.

SOUR1:ARB:RATE?

375

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Return Parameter <NRf>

Example

Returns the rate in Hz.

SOUR1:ARB:RATE?

+2.000000000000E+04

The rate is 20 kHz.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:GATE

Description

Source Specific

Command

Sets or queries whether a high or low level TTL signal applied to the trigger input turns the output on or off when the ARB output trigger is in the

Gated mode (for the selected channel).

Using this command will set the ARB output trigger as Gate Pos or Gate Neg and disable the

Ncycle or Infinite trigger settings.

Syntax SOURce[1|2]:ARB:GATE {POSitive|NEGative}

Parameter

Example

POSitive

NEGative

Query Syntax

Return Parameter OFF

Gated output when a high TTL level signal is applied.

Gated output when a low TTL level signal is applied.

SOUR1:ARB:GATE POS

Configures the CH1 ARB waveform to be output when a positive TTL signal is applied to the CH1 trigger input.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:GATE?

POSitive

Indicates that the trigger is in Ncycle mode.

Trigger gate polarity is negative.

Example

NEGative Trigger gate polarity is positive.

SOURce1:ARB:GATE?

OFF

The ARB output trigger is in Ncycle mode.

376


SOURce[1|2]:ARB:NCYCles

Source Specific

Command

Description Sets how the ARB Ncycle mode is triggered

Syntax SOURce[1|2]:ARB:NCYCles

{INFinite|MANual|EXTernal}

INFinite Continuous cycles Parameter

Example

MANual

EXTernal

Manual trigger

External trigger

SOUR1:ARB:NCYC INF

Sets the number of ARB waveform output cycles to continuous (infinite).

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:NCYCles? Query Syntax


INF

ARB output trigger is in the Gate mode.

Continuous cycles

MAN

EXT

Manual trigger

External trigger

Example SOUR1:ARB:NCYC?

INF

The ARB waveform output is set to infinite.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:NCYCles:CYCle

Description

Source Specific

Command

The arbitrary waveform output can be repeated for a designated number of cycles.

Syntax

Parameter

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:NCYCles:CYCle

{<cycles>|MINimum|MAXimum}

<cycles> 1 ~ 8388607 cycles

MINimum Minimum number of cycles (1)

MAXimum Maximum number of cycles (8388607)

377

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Example

Query Syntax SOURce[1|2]:ARB:NCYCles:CYCle?

{[MINimum|MAXimum]}

Return Parameter <NR3> Number of Ncycles.

Example

SOUR1:ARB:NCYC:CYC MAX

Sets the number of ARB waveform output cycles to the maximum.

SOUR1:ARB:NCYC:CYC?

+8.388607E+06

Sets the number of ncycles to 8388607.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:MANual:TRIGger

Description

Syntax

Example

Source Specific

Command

This command is used to manually trigger the

ARB output for the selected channel. This command is the equivalent of pressing the trigger soft-key on the front panel for manual triggering.

SOURce[1|2]:ARB:MANual:TRIGger

SOUR1:ARB:MAN:TRIG

Manually triggers the ARB waveform.

378


Tracking Commands

SOURce[1|2]:COUPle:FREQuency:MODE

Description

Source Specific

Command

Sets the frequency coupling mode for the AFG-

3022 and AFG-3032 models. By default, frequency coupling is turned off.

Syntax SOURce[1|2]:COUPle:FREQuency:MODE

{OFF|OFFSet|RATio}

Parameter

Example

OFF

OFFSet

RATio

Coupling off, independent output

Holds the frequency difference at a constant offset value

Holds the frequency ratio between each channel to constant ratio.

SOUR1:COUP:FREQ:MODE OFF

Turns frequency coupling off.

SOURce[1|2]:COUPle:FREQuency:MODE Query Syntax


OFFS

Coupling off, independent output

Set to constant offset value

Example

RAT Set to constant ratio value.

SOUR1:COUP:FREQ:MODE?

OFF

Indicates that frequency coupling is turned off.

379

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

SOURce[1|2]:COUPle:FREQuency:OFFSet

Description

Source Specific

Command

Sets the frequency coupling offset value. The default value is 0Hz. Applicable for the AFG-3022 and 3032 only.

Note: CH2 frequency = CH1 frequency + offset frequency. CH1 frequency is fixed regardless of whether the SOURce1 or SOURce2 command is used.

Syntax

Parameter

Example

SOURce[1|2]:COUPle:FREQuency:OFFSet


<frequency> Frequency difference in hertz.

Range: -30MHz ~ 30MHz

(20MHz AFG-3022)

Resolution: 1uHz

MINimum Sets the frequency to the minimum.

MAXimum Sets the frequency to the maximum.

SOUR1:COUP:FREQ:OFFS 1000

Sets the frequency coupling to 1kHz.

Query Syntax SOURce[1|2]:COUPle:FREQuency:OFFSet

{[MINimum|MAXimum]}

Return Parameter <NR3> Offset frequency.

Example SOUR1:COUP:FREQ:OFFS?

+1.000E+03

Indicates that the frequency coupling offset is

1kHz.

380


SOURce[1|2]:COUPle:FREQuency:RATio

Description

Source Specific

Command

Sets the frequency coupling ratio value for the selected channel. The default value is 1. Applicable for the AFG-3022 and AFG-3032 only.

The frequency ratio is defined as: CH2 frequency /

CH1 frequency. CH1 frequency is fixed regardless of whether the SOURce1 or SOURce2 command is used.

Syntax

Parameter

Example

Query Syntax


{<ratio>|MINimum|MAXimum}

<ratio> Range: 1000~0.001, resolution 0.001

MINimum Sets the ratio to the minimum (1000)

MAXimum Sets the ratio to the minimum (0.001)

SOUR1:COUP:FREQ:RAT 100

Sets the ratio value of CH1 to 100.


{[MINimum|MAXimum]}


Example

Returns the ratio.

SOUR1:COUP:FREQ:RAT?

+1.000E+02

Indicates that the ratio value for CH1 is 100.

381

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

SOURce[1|2]:COUPle:AMPLitude

Description

Source Specific

Command

Sets or queries the amplitude coupling state.

Amplitude coupling sets the amplitude of the selected channel to be the same as the other channel. By default amplitude coupling is turned off. Only applicable to the AFG-3022 and the AFG-

3032.

Syntax

Parameter

SOURce[1|2]:COUPle:AMPLitude {ON|OFF}

ON Turns amplitude coupling on.

Example

OFF Turns amplitude coupling off.

SOURce1:COUP:AMPL ON

Turns amplitude coupling on.

SOURce[1|2]:COUPle:AMPLitude?

Query Syntax

Return Parameter ON

OFF

Amplitude coupling is on.

Amplitude coupling is off.

Example SOUR1:COUP:AMPL?

ON

Indicates that amplitude coupling is on.

SOURce[1|2]:TRACking:STATe

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Sets or queries the tracking state of the selected channel. Tracking will set the waveform shape, frequency and amplitude of one channel to be the same as the other channel. Only applicable to the

AFG-3022 and the AFG-3032.

SOURce[1|2]:TRACking:STATe {ON|INVerted|OFF}

ON

INVerted

OFF

Turns channel tracking on.

Turns inverted channel tracking on.

Turns channel tracking off.

382


Example

Query Syntax

Parameter

Example

SOUR1:TRAC:STAT ON

Turns channel tracking on.

SOURce[1|2]:TRACking:STATe?

ON Channel tracking is on.

INV

OFF

Inverted channel tracking is on.

Channel tracking is off.

SOUR1:TRAC:STAT?

ON

Indicates that channel tracking is on.

383

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Reference Commands

SOURce[1|2]:REFerence

Description

Syntax

Parameter

Source Specific

Command

Sets or queries the 10MHz reference source as internal or external.

SOURce[1|2]:REFerence {INTernal|EXTernal}

INTernal Sets the reference to the internal source.

Example

Query Syntax

Parameter

Example

EXTernal Sets the reference to the external source.

SOUR1:REF INT

Sets the reference to the internal source.

SOURce[1|2]:REFerence?

INT

EXT

The reference is the internal source.

The reference is the external source.

SOUR1:REF?

INT

Indicates that reference is set to internal.

SOURce[1|2]:REFerence:SYNChronous

Description

Source Specific

Command

Allows the unit to synchronize with a 10MHz external reference signal. Equivalent to the setting the clock source to EXT Sync when using the front panel operation.

Syntax SOURce[1|2]:REFerence:SYNChronous

384


Save and Recall Commands

Up to 10 different instrument states can be stored to non-volatile memory (memory locations 0~9).

*SAV

Description

Note

Syntax

Example

Instrument

Command

Saves the current instrument state to a specified save slot. When a state is saved, all the current instrument settings, functions and waveforms are also saved.

The *SAV command doesn’t save waveforms in non-volatile memory, only the instrument state.

The *RST command will not delete saved instrument states from memory.

*SAV {0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9}

*SAV 0

Save the instrument state to memory location 0.

*RCL

Instrument

Command

Description

Syntax

Example

Recall previously saved instrument states from memory locations 0~9.

*RCL {0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9}

*RCL 0

Recall instrument state from memory location 0.

MEMory:STATe:DELete

Description

Instrument

Command

Delete memory from a specified memory location.

Syntax MEMory:STATe:DELete {0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9}

385

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Example MEM:STAT:DEL 0

Delete instrument state from memory location 0.

MEMory:STATe:DELete ALL

Instrument

Command

Description

Syntax

Example

Delete memory from all memory locations, 0~9.

MEMory:STATe:DELete ALL

MEM:STAT:DEL ALL

Deletes all the instrument states from memory locations 0~9.

MEMory:STATe?

Source Specific

Command

Description

Query Syntax

Queries the memory state of memory locations 0

~9 as “Valid” or “Empty”.

MEMory:STATe?

Return Parameter Returns the following string:

0:<state>,1:<state>,2:<state>,3:<state>,4<state>,5:

<state>,6:<state>,7:<state>,8:<state>,9:<state>

<state> Where state is “Empty” or “Valid”.

Example MEMory:STATe?

0:Valid,1:Empty,2:Empty,3:Empty,4:Empty,5:Empty,6:E mpty,7:Empty,8:Empty,9:Empty

Indicates memory 0 is valid and all other memory locations are empty.

386


Error Messages

The AFG-30XX has a number of specific error codes. Use the

SYSTem:ERRor command to recall the error codes. For more

information regarding the error queue, see page 405.

Command Error Codes

-101 Invalid character

An invalid character was used in the command string. Example: #, $, %.

-102 Syntax error

SOURce1:AM:DEPTh MIN%

Invalid syntax was used in the command string.

Example: An unexpected character may have been encountered, like an unexpected space.

SOURce1:APPL:SQUare , 1

-103 Invalid separator

An invalid separator was used in the command string. Example: a space, comma or colon was incorrectly used.

APPL:SIN 1 1000 OR SOURce1:APPL:SQUare

-108 Parameter not allowed

The command received more parameters than were expected. Example: An extra (not needed) parameter was added to a command

SOURce1:APPL? 10

-109 Missing parameter

The command received less parameters than expected. Example: A required parameter was omitted.

SOURce1:APPL:SQUare .

387

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

-112 Program mnemonic too long

A command header contains more than 12 characters:

OUTP:SYNCHRONIZATION ON

-113 Undefined header

An undefined header was encountered. The header is syntactically correct. Example: the header contains a character mistake.

SOUR1:AMM:DEPT MIN

-123 Exponent too large

Numeric exponent exceeds 32,000. Example:

SOURce[1]:BURSt:NCYCles 1E34000

-124 Too many digits

The mantissa (excluding leading 0’s) contains more than 255 digits.

-128 Numeric data not allowed

An unexpected numeric character was received in the command. Example: a numeric parameter is used instead of a character string.

SOURce1:BURSt:MODE 123

-131 Invalid suffix

An invalid suffix was used. Example: An unknown or incorrect suffix may have been used with a parameter.

SOURce1:SWEep:TIME 0.5 SECS

-138 Suffix not allowed

A suffix was used where none were expected.

Example: Using a suffix when not allowed.

SOURce1:BURSt: NCYCles 12 CYC

-148 Character data not allowed

A parameter was used in the command where not allowed. Example: A discrete parameter was used where a numeric parameter was expected.

SOUR1:SWE:TRIG ON

388


-158 String data not allowed

An unexpected character string was used where none were expected. Example: A character string is used instead of a valid parameter.

SOURce1:SWEep:FUNCtion ’TEN’

-161 Invalid block data

Invalid block data was received. Example: The number of bytes sent with the DATA:DAC command doesn’t correlate to the number of bytes specified in the block header.

-168 Block data not allowed

Block data was received where block data is not allowed. Example:

SOURce1:BURSt:NCYCles:CYCles #10

-170~177 expression errors

Example: The mathematical expression used was not valid.

Execution Errors

-211 Trigger ignored

A trigger was received but ignored. Example:

Triggers will be ignored until the function that can use a trigger is enabled (burst, sweep, etc.).

-223 Too much data

Data was received that contained too much data.

Example: An arbitrary waveform with over 8388708 points cannot be used.

-221 Settings conflict; turned off infinite burst to allow immediate trigger source

Example: Infinite burst is disabled when an immediate trigger source is selected. Burst count set to 1,000,000 cycles.

389

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

-221 Settings conflict; infinite burst changed trigger source to MANual

Example: The trigger source is changed to immediate from manual when infinite burst mode is selected.

-221 Settings conflict; burst period increased to fit entire burst

Example: The function generator automatically increases the burst period to allow for the burst count or frequency.

-221 Settings conflict; burst count reduced

Example: The burst count is reduced to allow for the waveform frequency if the burst period is at it’s maximum.

-221 Settings conflict; trigger delay reduced to fit entire burst

Example: The trigger delay is reduced to allow the current period and burst count.

-221 Settings conflict;amplitude units changed to Vpp due to high-Z load

Example: If the output impedance is set to high, dBm units cannot be used. The units are automatically set to Vpp.

-221 Settings conflict: made compatible with pulse function

Example: When the function is changed to pulse, the output frequency is automatically reduced if over range.

-221 Settings conflict;frequency reduced for ramp function

Example: When the function is changed to ramp, the output frequency is automatically reduced if over range.

-221 Settings conflict;frequency reduced for triangle function

Example: When the function is changed to triangle, the output frequency is automatically reduced if over range.

390


-221 Settings conflict;frequency made compatible with burst mode

Example: When the function is changed to burst, the output frequency is automatically adjusted if over range.

-221 Settings conflict;not able to modulate this function

Example: A modulated waveform cannot be generated with noise or pulse waveforms.

-221 Settings conflict;not able to sweep this function

Example: A swept waveform cannot be generated with noise or pulse waveforms.

-221 Settings conflict: Burst function can not be performed under current setting.

Example: The burst function cannot be used with harmonic waveforms.

-221 Settings conflict: ARB Ncycle function can not be performed under current setting. nNcycle function will be disabled.

-221 Settings conflict: Sweep Gate function can not be performed under current setting.

Gate function will be disabled.

-221 Settings conflict: Function can not be performed under current setting.

Function is disabled.

-221 Settings conflict;pulse width decreased due to period

Example: The pulse width has been adjusted to suit the period settings.

391

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

-221 Settings conflict;amplitude changed due to function

Example: The amplitude (VRM / dBm) has been adjusted to suit the selected function. For the AFG-

30XX, a typical square wave has a much higher amplitude (5V Vrms) compared to a sine wave

(~3.54) due to crest factor.

-221 Settings conflict;FM deviation cannot exceed carrier

Example: The deviation cannot be set higher than the carrier frequency

-221 Settings conflict;FM deviation exceeds max frequency

Example: If the FM deviation and carrier frequency combined exceeds the maximum frequency plus 100 kHz, the deviation is automatically adjusted.

-221 Settings conflict;frequency forced duty cycle change

Example: If the frequency is changed and the current duty cannot be supported at the new frequency, the duty will be automatically adjusted.

-221 Settings conflict:frequency forced symmetry change.

Example: This error occurs when SYM is set larger than 100%.

-221 Settings conflict;offset changed due to amplitude

Example: The offset is not a valid offset value, it is automatically adjusted, considering the amplitude.

|offset|≤ max amplitude – Vpp/2

-221 Settings conflict;amplitude changed due to offset

Example: The amplitude is not a valid value, it is automatically adjusted, considering the offset.

Vpp ≤ 2X (max amplitude -|offset|)

-221 Settings conflict;low level changed due to high level

Example: The low level value was set too high. The low level is set 1 mV less than the high level.

392


-221 Settings conflict;high level changed due to low level

Example: The high level value was set too low. The high level is set 1 mV greater than the low level.

-222 Data out of range;value clipped to upper limit

Example: The parameter was set out of range. The parameter is automatically set to the maximum value allowed.

SOURce[1]:FREQuency 30.1MHz.

-222 Data out of range;value clipped to lower limit

Example: The parameter was set out of range. The parameter is automatically set to the minimum value allowed.

SOURce[1]:FREQuency 0.1μHz.

-222 Data out of range: pulse width limited by period.

Example: The pulse width is limited by the period according to the formula below.

Period ≧ Width+ 0.625 * [(Rise Time - 0.6nS)+(Fall Time -

0.6nS)]

To resolve the error, set the duty to the smallest possible value and then increase the frequency until the duty changes accordingly.

-222 Data out of range: pulse rise/fall time limited by pulse width

Example: The rise/fall time is limited by the pulse width according to the formula below.

Width - 0.625 * [(Rise Time - 0.6nS) + (Fall Time - 0.6nS)] ≧

0

-222 Data out of range;period;

Example: If the period was set to a value out of range, it is automatically set to an upper or lower limit.

393

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

-222 Data out of range;frequency;

Example: If the frequency was set to a value out of range, it is automatically set to an upper or lower limit.

-222 Data out of range;user frequency; value clipped to upper limit

Example: If the frequency is set to a value out of range for an arbitrary waveform using

SOURce[1|2]: APPL:USER, it is automatically set to the upper limit.

-222 Data out of range;ramp frequency; value clipped to upper limit

Example: If the frequency is set to a value out of range for a ramp waveform using, SOURce[1|2]:

APPL: RAMP, it is automatically set to the upper limit.

-222 Data out of range;pulse frequency; value clipped to upper limit

Example: If the frequency is set to a value out of range for a pulse waveform using, SOURce[1|2]:

APPL:PULS, it is automatically set to the upper limit.

-222 Data out of range;burst period;

Example: If the burst period was set to a value out of range, it is automatically set to an upper or lower limit.

222 Data out of range;burst count;

Example: If the burst count was set to a value out of range, it is automatically set to an upper or lower limit.

394


-222 Data out of range; burst period limited by length of burst; value clipped to upper limit

Example: The burst period must be greater than burst count divided by the frequency + 200 ns. The burst period is adjusted to satisfy these conditions. burst period > 200 ns + (burst count/burst frequency).

-222 Data out of range; burst count limited by length of burst; value clipped to lower limit

Example: The burst count must be less than burst period * the waveform frequency when the the trigger source is set to immediate

(SOURce[1|2]:BURSt:TRIGger IMM). The burst count is automatically set to the lower limit.

-222 Data out of range;amplitude;

Example: If the amplitude was set to a value out of range, it is automatically set to an upper or lower limit.

-222 Data out of range;offset;

Example: If the offset was set to a value out of range, it is automatically set to an upper or lower limit.

-222 Data out of range;frequency in burst mode;

Example: If the frequency was set to a value out of range in burst mode. The burst frequency is automatically set to an upper or lower limit, taking the burst period into account.

-222 Data out of range;frequency in FM;

Example: The carrier frequency is limited by the frequency deviation (SOURce[1]: FM:DEV). The carrier frequency is automatically adjusted to be less than or equal to the frequency deviation.

395

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

-222 Data out of range;FM deviation; value clipped to ...

Example: The frequency deviation is outside of range. The deviation is automatically adjusted to an upper or lower limit, depending on the frequency.

-222 Data out of range;trigger delay; value clipped to upper limit

Example: The trigger delay was set to a value out of range. The trigger delay has been adjusted to the maximum (85 seconds).

-222 Data out of range; trigger delay limited by length of burst; value clipped to upper limit

Example: The trigger delay and the burst cycle time combined must be less than the burst period.

-222 Data out of range;duty cycle;

Example: The duty cycle is limited depending on the frequency.

Duty Cycle

40%~60%

Frequency

25 MHz ~ 30MHz

20%~80% < 25 MHz

-222 Data out of range; duty cycle limited by frequency; value clipped to upper limit

Example: The duty cycle is limited depending on the frequency. When the frequency is greater than 25

MHz, the duty cycle is automatically limited to 60%.

-313 Calibration memory lost;memory corruption detected

Indicates that a fault (check sum error) has occurred with the non-volatile memory that stores the calibration data.

-314 Save/recall memory lost;memory corruption detected

Indicates that a fault (check sum error) has occurred with the non-volatile memory that stores the save/recall files.

396


-315 Configuration memory lost;memory corruption detected

Indicates that a fault (check sum error) has occurred with the non-volatile memory that stores the configuration settings.

-350 Queue overflow

Indicates that the error queue is full (over 20 messages generated, and not yet read). No more messages will be stored until the queue is empty.

The queue can be cleared by reading each message, using the *CLS command or restarting the function generator.

397

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Query Errors

-410 Query INTERRUPTED

Indicates that a command was received but the data in the output buffer from a previous command was lost.

-420 Query UNTERMINATED

The function generator is ready to return data, however there was no data in the output buffer. For example: Using the APPLy command.

-430 Query DEADLOCKED

Indicates that a command generates more data than the output buffer can receive and the input buffer is full. The command will finish execution, though all the data won’t be kept.

Arbitrary Waveform Errors

-770 Nonvolatile arb waveform memory corruption detected

Indicates that a fault (check sum error) has occurred with the non-volatile memory that stores the arbitrary waveform data.

-781 Not enough memory to store new arb waveform; bad sectors

Indicates that a fault (bad sectors) has occurred with the non-volatile memory that stores the arbitrary waveform data. Resulting in not enough memory to store arbitrary data.

-787 Not able to delete the currently selected active arb waveform

Example: The currently selected waveform is being output and cannot be deleted.

398


800 Block length must be even

Example: As block data (DATA:DAC VOLATILE) uses two bytes to store each data point, there must be an even number or bytes for a data block.

399

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

SCPI Status Registers

The status registers are used to record and determine the status of the function generator.

The function generator has a number of register groups:

Questionable Status Registers

Standard Event Status Registers

Status Byte Register

As well as the output and error queues.

Each register group is divided into three types of registers: condition registers, event registers and enable registers.

Register types

Condition

Register

The condition registers indicate the state of the function generator in real time. The condition registers are not triggered. I.e., the bits in the condition register change in real time with the instrument status. Reading a condition register will not clear it. The condition registers cannot be cleared or set.

Event Register The Event Registers indicate if an event has been triggered in the condition registers. The event registers are latched and will remain set unless the

*CLS command is used. Reading an event register will not clear it.

Enable Register The Enable register determines which status event(s) are enabled. Any status events that are not enabled are ignored. Enabled events are used to summarize the status of that register group.

400

AFG-30XX Status System

Questionable Status Register

Condition Event Enable

0 Volt Ovld

1

2

3

4 Over Temp

5 Loop Unlock

6

7 Ext Mod Ovld

8 Cal Error

9 External Ref

10

11

12

13

14

15

11

12

13

14

15 bit

7

8

9

10

3

4

5

6

0

1

2

<1>

<2>

<4>

<8>

<16>

<32>

<64>

<128>

<256>

<512>

<1024>

<2048>

<4096>

<8192>

<16384>

NOT USED weight

+

OR

Output Buffer

1

20

Standard Event Register

0 Operation Complete

1

2 Query Error

3 Device Error

4 Execution Error

5 Command Error

6

7 Power On

Event Enable

4

5

6

7 bit

0

1

2

3

<1>

<2>

<4>

<8>

<16>

<32>

<64>

<128> weight

+

OR


Error Queue

1

20

Status Byte Register

Condition Enable

3

4

5

6

0

1

2

7 bit

<1>

<2>

<4>

<8>

<16>

<32>

<128> weight

Summary Bit (RQS)

+

OR

401

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Questionable Status Register

Description The Questionable Status Registers will show if any faults or errors have occurred.

Bit Summary Register

Voltage overload

Over temperature

Loop unlock

Ext Mod Overload

Cal Error

External Reference

7

8

9

4

5

Bit

0

Bit Weight

1

16

32

128

256

512

Standard Event Status Registers

Description The Standard Event Status Registers indicate when the *OPC command has been executed or whether any programming errors have occurred.

Notes The Standard Event Status Enable register is cleared when the *ESE 0 command is used.

The Standard Event Status Event register is cleared when the *CLS command or the *ESR? command is used.

402

Bit Summary

Error Bits


Register Bit

Operation complete bit 0

Query Error

Device Error

Execution Error

Command Error

2

3

4

5

Power On

Operation complete

Bit Weight

1

4

8

16

32

7 128

The operation complete bit is set when all selected pending operations are complete. This bit is set in response to the *OPC command.

Query Error The Query Error bit is set when there is an error reading the Output

Queue. This can be caused by trying to read the Output Queue when there is no data present.

Device Error The Device Dependent Error indicates a failure of the self-test, calibration, memory or other device dependent error.

Execution

Error

The Execution bit indicates an execution error has occurred.

Command

Error

Power On

The Command Error bit is set when a syntax error has occurred.

Power has been reset.

403

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

The Status Byte Register

Description

Notes

The Status Byte register consolidates the status events of all the status registers. The Status Byte register can be read with the *STB? query or a serial poll and can be cleared with the *CLS command.

Clearing the events in any of the status registers will clear the corresponding bit in the Status Byte register.

The Status byte enable register is cleared when the

*SRE 0 command is used.

The Status Byte Condition register is cleared when the *CLS command is used.

Bit Summary

Status Bits

Register

Error Queue

Questionable Data

Message Available

Standard Event

Bit

2

3

4

5

Bit Weight

4

8

16

32

Master Summary /

Request Service

6 64

Error Queue There are error message(s) waiting in the error queue.

Questionable data

Message

Available

The Questionable bit is set when an “enabled” questionable event has occurred.

The Message Available bit is set when there is outstanding data in the Output Queue. Reading all messages in the output queue will clear the message available bit.

404


Standard Event The Event Status bit is set if an

“enabled” event in the Standard

Event Status Event Register has occurred.

Master

Summary/

Service

Request bit

The Master Summary Status is used with the *STB? query. When the *STB? query is read the MSS bit is not cleared.

The Request Service bit is cleared when it is polled during a serial poll.

Output Queue

Description The Output queue stores output messages in a

FIFO buffer until read. If the Output Queue has data, the MAV bit in the Status Byte Register is set.

Error Queue

Description The error queue is queried using the

SYSTem:ERRor? command. The Error queue will set the “Error Queue“ bit in the status byte register if there are any error messages in the error queue.

If the error queue is full the last message will generate a “Queue overflow” error and additional errors will not be stored. If the error queue is empty, “No error” will be returned.

Error messages are stored in the error queue in a first-in-first-out order. The errors messages are character strings that can contain up to 255 characters.

405

A

PPENDIX

Fuse Replacement

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Procedure 1. Remove the power cord and remove the fuse socket using a minus driver.

AC

100 

240V

2. Replace the fuse in the holder.

Ratings

AC

100 

240V

85VA

AFG-3022 & AFG-3032: T1A/250V

AFG-3021 & AFG-3031: T0.63A/250V

406

APPENDIX

AFG-3021, AFG-3022, AFG-3031 & AFG-3032

Specifications

The specifications apply when the function generator is powered on for at least 30 minutes under +20°C~+30°C.

General Specification

Channels

Instrument

Chassis

Waveforms

Signal Ground —

Standard

AFG-3021 AFG-3031 AFG-3022 AFG-3032

1 1 2 2

Isolated Isolated Isolated Isolated

— Isolated Isolated

Sine, Square, Ramp, Pulse, Noise,

Harmonic, DC

Arbitrary Waveforms

ARB Function

Sample Rate

Repetition Rate

Waveform Length

Amplitude

Resolution

Non-Volatile

Memory

Built in

250 MSa/s

125MHz

8M points

16 bits

Ten 8M waveforms(1)

User-defined

Output Section

Any section from 2 to 8M points

Trigger Infinite/Manual/External

Built-in Arbitrary Sine, Square, Ramp, Sinc, Exp Rise, Exp

Fall, DC, Pulse, Abstan, Havercosine,

Sinever, Abssin, Haversine, Stair_down,

Abssinehalf, N_pulse, Stair_UD, Ampalt,

Negramp, Stair_up, Attalt, Rectpuls1,

Stepresp, Diric_even, Roundhalf, Trapezia,

Diric_odd, Sawtoot, Tripuls1, Gauspuls1,

Sinetra, Dlorentz, Ln, Sqrt, Since, Lorentz,

Xsquare, Gauss, Arccos, Arctan, Sech,

Arccot, Arctanh, Sinh, Arccsc, Cosh, Tan,

Arcsec, Cot, Tanh, Arcsin, Csc, Arcsinh, Sec,

Barthannwin, Chebwin, Kaiser, Bartlett,

Flattopwin, Triang, Blackman, Hamming,

Tukeywin, Bohmanwin, Hann

407

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Frequency Characteristics

Range

Resolution

Accuracy

Sine

Square

Triangle, Ramp

Stability

20MHz 30MHz 20MHz 30MHz

20MHz 30MHz 20MHz 30MHz

1MHz

1μHz

±1 ppm 0 to 50 ˚C

Offset

Aging

Tolerance

Output Characteristics(2)

Amplitude Range

Waveform Output Impedance

Sync Output

Accuracy

Resolution

Flatness

Units

Range

Accuracy

Protection

Ground Isolation

Level

Impedance

Ground Isolation

Sine wave Characteristics

Harmonic

Dstortion(5)

Total Harmonic

Distortion

Spurious (nonharmonic)(5)

Phase Noise

±0.3 ppm 18 to 28 ˚C

±1 ppm, per 1 year

≤1 μHz

1 mVpp to 10 Vpp( into 50Ω)

2 mVpp to 20 Vpp(open-circuit)

± 1% of setting ±1 mVpp

(at 1 kHz/into 50Ω without DC offset)

0.1 mV or 4 digits

±0.1dB: <10 MHz

±0.2 dB: 10 MHz to 30 MHz

(sinewave relative to 1 kHz/into 50Ω)

Vpp, Vrms, dBm,

±5 Vpk ac +dc (into 50Ω)

±10Vpk ac +dc (open circuit)

1% of setting + 2 mV + 0.5% Amplitude

50Ω typical (fixed)

> 10MΩ (output disabled)

Short-circuit protected

Overload relay automatically disables main output

42Vpk max.

TTL-compatible into>1kΩ

50Ω nominal

42Vpk max.

(same ground as CH1 output)

–60 dBc DC ~ 1 MHz, Ampl<3 Vpp

–55 dBc DC ~ 1 MHz, Ampl>3 Vpp

–45 dBc 1MHz ~ 5 MHz, Ampl>3 Vpp

–30 dBc 5MHz ~ 30 MHz, Ampl>3 Vpp

< 0.2%+0.1mVrms

DC to 20 kHz

–60 dBc DC~1 MHz

–50 dBc 1MHz~20MHz

–50 dBc + 6 dBc/octave 1MHz~ 30 MHz(AFG-

3031/3032 only)

< -110dBc/Hz (typical), 15kHz offset, fc=10MHz

408

APPENDIX

Square wave Characteristics

Rise/Fall Time

Overshoot

Asymmetry

(@50% duty)

Variable Duty

Cycle

Jitter

Ramp Characteristics

Linearity

Variable

Symmetry

Pulse Characteristics

Frequency

<8 ns(3)

<5%

1% of period +1 ns

20.0% to

80.0%:

≤ 20 MHz

20.0% to

80.0%:

≤ 25 MHz

40.0% to

60.0%:

20.0% to

80.0%:

≤ 20 MHz

25~

30MHz

0.01%+525ps < 2 MHz

0.1%+75ps > 2 MHz

20.0% to

80.0%:

≤ 25 MHz

40.0% to

60.0%:

25~

30MHz

< 0.1% of peak output

0% to 100% (0.1% resolution)

Width

Duty Setting

Range

Period

Rise time and

Fall Time

Resolution

Overshoot

Jitter

1uHz ~

20MHz

1uHz ~

25MHz

1uHz ~

20MHz

1uHz ~

25MHz

20ns ~ 999.83ks

(Extended mode 0.00ns ~1,000ks (6) )

Width - 0.625 * [(Rise Time - 0.6ns)

+ (Fall Time - 0.6ns)] ≧ 0

Period ≧ Width+ 0.625 * [(Rise Time -

0.6nS)+(Fall Time - 0.6ns)]

0.017% to 99.983%

(Extended mode 0.0000% to 100.0000% (6) )

40ns ~ 1000000s

9.32ns ~ 799.89ks

Noise

Noise Type

Noise

Bandwidth

0.0001%

< 5%

50ps typical (<10kHz)

Gaussian

100MHz equivalent bandwidth

Harmonic

Harmonic Order ≤ 8

409

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Harmonic Type Even, Odd, All, User

Amplitude and Phase can be set for all harmonics

AM Modulation

Carrier

Waveforms

Modulating

Waveforms

Modulating

Frequency

Depth

Source

Sine, Square, Triangle, Ramp, Pulse, Noise,

Arb

Sine, Square, Triangle, Up/Dn Ramp

2mHz to 20kHz

FM Modulation

0% to 120.0%

Internal / External

Sine, Square, Triangle, Ramp Carrier

Waveforms

Modulating

Waveforms

Modulating

Frequency

Peak Deviation


2mHz to 20kHz

PWM

FSK

Source

DC to 30MHz(1 uHz resolution)

(DC to 20MHz for AFG-3021/3022)

Internal / External

Carrier

Waveforms

Modulating

Waveforms

Modulating

Frequency

Deviation

Source

Square


2mHz to 20kHz

Source

0% ~ 100.0% of pulse width, 0.1% resolution

Internal / External

Sine, Square, Triangle, Ramp Carrier

Waveforms

Modulating

Waveforms

Internal Rate

Frequency Range DC to

20MHz

50% duty cycle square

2mHz to 1MHz

DC to

30MHz

DC to

20MHz

Internal / External

DC to

30MHz

Additive modulation (Sum)

Carrier

Waveforms

Modulating

Waveforms

Sine, Triangle, Ramp, Pulse, Noise


410

APPENDIX

PM

Ratio

Modulating

Frequency

Source

0% to 100% of carrier amplitude, 0.01% resolution

2mHz to 20kHz

Internal /External

Sweep

Carrier

Waveforms

Modulating

Waveforms

Phase Deviation

Setting Range

Modulating

Frequency

Source

Sine, Triangle, Ramp


0° to 360°, 0.1° resolution

2mHz to 20kHz

Burst

Waveforms

Type

Functions

Directions

Start/Stop

Frequency

Sweep Time

Trigger Mode

Trigger Source

Waveforms

Internal

Frequency Sweep: Sine, Square, Triangle,

Ramp

Amplitude Sweep: Sine, Square, Triangle,

Ramp, Pulse, Noise, ARB

Frequency, Amplitude

Linear or Logarithmic

Up or Down

Any frequency within the waveform’s range

1ms to 500s (1ms resolution)

Single, External, Internal

Internal/External

Sine, Square, Triangle, Ramp, Pulse and

1μHz to

Noise

1μHz to 1μHz to 1μHz to Frequency

20MHz 30MHz(4) 20MHz

1 to 1000000 cycles or Infinite

-360.0º to +360.0º (0.1º resolution)

1us to 500s

30MHz(4)

Burst Count

Start/Stop Phase

Internal Period

Gate Source

Trigger Source

Trigger Delay

External Trigger (pulse waveforms can only be used in gate mode)

Single, External or Internal Rate

N-Cycle, Infinite: 0us to 100s(1us resolution)

External Modulation Input

Type

Voltage Range

Input

Impedance

Frequency

AM, FM, PWM, Sum

± 5V full scale

10k Ω

DC to 20kHz

411

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Ground

Isolation

Modulation Output (AFG-3021/3031)

Type

Amplitude

Impedance

42Vpk max.

(same ground as corresponding channel)

AM, FM, PWM, PM, Sum, Sweep

≥ 1Vpp

> 10k Ω typical

External Trigger Input

Latency

Jitter

Type

Input Level

Slope

Pulse Width

Input rate

Input

Impedance

Sweep

Burst

ARB

Sweep

Burst

10 MHz Reference Output

Output Voltage

Output

Impedance

Output

Frequency

10 MHz Reference Input

Input Voltage

Input

Impedance

Max. Allowed

Input

Input Frequency

Waveform

Ground

Isolation

External-Sync

Phase Delay

(max.)

Maximum number of connected units

Applicable

Functions

For FSK, Burst, Sweep, N Cycle ARB

TTL Compatibility

Rising or Falling (Selectable)

>100ns

DC to 1MHz

10k Ω, DC coupled

< (27.5/sample rate) + 274ns

1 ns; except pulse, 300 ps

<1us (typical)

<0.55us (typical)

2.5 us

1 Vp-p/50Ω square wave

50Ω, AC coupled

10MHz

0.5Vp-p to 5Vp-p

1kΩ, unbalanced, AC coupled

± 10Vdc

10MHz ± 10Hz

Sine or square (50±5% duty)

42Vpk max.

Series Connection: 39+(N-2)*39 ±25nS

Parallel connection: (N-1)*6 ±25nS

(where N=number of connected units)

Series Connection: 4

Parallel Connection: 6

Sine, Square, Triangle, Pulse, Ramp,

Harmonic, MOD, Sweep, Burst

412

APPENDIX

Store/Recall

Interface

Display

General Specifications

Power Source

Power

Consumption

Operating

Environment

10 Groups of Setting Memories

GPIB(optional), LAN, USB

4.3 inch TFT LCD, 480 × 3 (RGB) × 272

AC100 - 240V, 50 - 60Hz

85 VA for AFG-3032 & AFG-3022

50VA for AFG-3021 & AFG-3031

Temperature to satisfy the specification:

18 ~ 28 ˚C

Operating temperature: 0 ~ 40 ˚C

Relative Humidity: ≤ 80%, 0 ~ 40 ˚C

≤ 70%, 35 ~ 40 ˚C

Operating

Altitude

Pollution Degree

Storage

Temperature

Bench Top

Weight

Installation category: CAT Ⅱ

2000 meters

EN 61010 Degree 2, Indoor Use

-10~70 ˚C, Humidity: ≤70%

Dimensions

Safety Designed to

EMC Tested to

Accessories

265(W) x 107(H) x 374(D)

Approx. 3.5kg

EN 61010-1

EN 61326, EN 55011

Test cable(GTL-110×1 for AFG-

3021/3031, GTL-110×2 for AFG-

3022/3032), User Manual Compact

Disk × 1, Quick Start Guide × 1,

Power cord × 1

(1). A total of ten waveforms can be stored. (Every waveform can be composed of

8M points maximum.)

(2). Add 1/10th of output amplitude and offset specification per ºC for operation outside of 0ºC to 28ºC range (1-year specification).

(3). Edge time decreased at higher frequency.

(4). Sine and square waveforms above 25 MHz are allowed only with an “Infinite” burst count.

(5). Harmonic distortion and Spurious noise at low amplitudes is limited by a -70 dBm floor.

(6). Loss may occur if the pulse width is beyond the setting range of the normal mode. The pulse may vanish at times.

413

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Declaration of Conformity

We

GOOD WILL INSTRUMENT CO., LTD. declare that the below mentioned product

Type of Product: Arbitrary Function Generator

Model Number: AFG-3021, AFG-3031, AFG-3022, AFG-3032 are herewith confirmed to comply with the requirements set out in the

Council Directive on the Approximation of the Law of Member States relating to Electromagnetic Compatibility (2014/30/EU) and Low

Voltage Equipment Directive (2014/35/EU).

For the evaluation regarding the Electromagnetic Compatibility and

Low Voltage Directive, the following standards were applied:

◎ EMC

EN 61326-1 :

EN 61326-2-1:

Electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use –– EMC requirements (2013)

Conducted and Radiated Emissions

EN 55011:2009+A1:2010

Electrical Fast Transients

EN 61000-4-4:2012

Current Harmonic

EN 61000-3-2:2014

Voltage Fluctuation

EN 61000-3-3:2013

Surge Immunity

EN 61000-4-5: 2006

Conducted Susceptibility

EN 61000-4-6: 2014

Electrostatic Discharge

EN 61000-4-2: 2009

Radiated Immunity

EN 61000-4-3:2006+A1:2008+A2:2010

Power Frequency Magnetic Field

EN 61000-4-8:2010

Voltage Dips/ Interrupts

EN 61000-4-11: 2004

Low Voltage Equipment Directive 2014/35/EU

Safety Requirements EN 61010-1:2010 (Third Edition)

EN 61010-2-030:2010 (First Edition)

GOODWILL INSTRUMENT CO., LTD.

No. 7-1, Jhongsing Road, Tucheng District, New Taipei City 236, Taiwan

Tel: +886-2-2268-0389

Web: http://www.gwinstek.com

Fax: +886-2-2268-0639

Email: [email protected]

GOODWILL INSTRUMENT (SUZHOU) CO., LTD.

No. 521, Zhujiang Road, Snd, Suzhou Jiangsu 215011, China

Tel: +86-512-6661-7177

Web: http://www.instek.com.cn

Fax: +86-512-6661-7277


GOODWILL INSTRUMENT EURO B.V.

De Run 5427A, 5504DG Veldhoven, The Netherlands

Tel: +31-(0)40-2557790 Fax: +31-(0)40-2541194


414

ARB Built-In Waveforms

Basic

Sine y= sin(x)

Square 50% duty square waveform

Ramp 50% symmetry

Sinc y=sinc(x)

Exp Rise Exponential rise

Exp Fall Exponential fall

DC

Pulse

DC waveform

Pulse waveform with user-defined frequency and duty

APPENDIX

415

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Common 1

Absatan y=|atan(x)|

The absolute of atan(x)

Havercosine y=(1-sin(x))/2

Havercosine function

Sinever Piecewise sine function

Abssin y=|sin(x)|

The absolute of sin(x)

Haversine y=(1-cos(x))/2

Haversine function

Stair_down Step down

Abssinehalf y=sin(x),0<x<pi y=0,pi<x<2pi

Half_wave function

N_pulse Negative pulse

Stair_ud Step up and step down

416

Ampalt y=e(x).sin(x)

Oscillation rise

Negramp y=-x

Line segment

Stair_up Step up

Common 2

Attalt y=e(-x).sin(x)

Oscillation down

Rectpuls Sampled aperiodic rectangle

Stepresp Heaviside step function

Diric Even f(x)=-1^(x*(n-1)/2*pi) x=0,±2*pi,±4*pi,……

Roundhalf y=sqrt(1-x^2)

The half roud

APPENDIX

417

Trapezia

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Piecewise function

Diric

Sawtoot

Odd f(x)=sin(nx/2)/n*sin(x/2) x=±pi,±3pi，……

Sawtooth or triangle wave

Tripuls Sampled aperiodic triangle

Gauspuls f(x)=a*e^(-(x-b)^2)/c^2)

Gaussian-modulated sinusoidal pulse

Sinetra Piecewise function

Math

Dlorentz

Ln

The derivative of the lorentz function y=-

2x/(k*x^2+1)

Logarithm function

Sqrt y=sqrt(x)

418

Since y=sin(x)/x

Lorentz Lorentz function y=1/(k*x^2+1)

Xsquare Parabola

Gauss A waveform representing a gaussian bell curve

Trig

Arccos Arc cosine

Arctan Arc tangent

Sech Hyperbolic secant

Arccot Arc cotangent

Arctanh Hyperbolic arc tangent

APPENDIX

419

Sinh

Arccsc

Cosh

Tan

Arcsec

Cot

Tanh

Arcsin

Csc

Hyperbolic sine

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

Arc cosecant

Hyperbolic cosine

Tangent

Arc secant

Cotangent

Hyperbolic tangent

Arc sine

Cosecant

420

Arcsinh Hyperbolic arc sine

Sec Secant

Window

Barthannwin Modified Bartlett-Hann window

Chebwin The Chebyshev window function

Kaiser The Kaiser window function

Bartlett

Flattopwin

The Bartlett window is very similar to a triangular window as returned by the triang function.

The Flattopwin window function

Triang The Triang window function

Blackman The Blackman window function

APPENDIX

421

Hamming

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

The Hamming window function

Tukeywin The Tukey window function

Bohmanwin The Bohman window function

Hann The Hann window function

422

INDEX

I

NDEX

Amplitude coupling ................ 184

Arbitrary waveforms ............... 191

Built-In ......................................... 192 display ......................................... 199 navigation ...................... 203 overview ........................ 205 editing .......................................... 206 inserting ....................................... 192 saving ........................................... 222

Beeper ........................................ 171

Built-in ARB waveforms ......... 415

Caution symbol ............................ 6

Channel tracking ...................... 185

Cleaning the instrument ............. 9

Declaration of conformity ....... 414

Default settings .......................... 68

Digital inputs .............................. 28

Display diagram ..........................................23

Display brightness ................... 172

Display suspend ...................... 172

Disposal symbol..............................................7

Disposal instructions ................. 10

DSO link ............................ 176, 181

Dual channel ............................ 179 amplitude coupling .................... 184 channel tracking ......................... 185 dso link ................................ 176, 181 frequence coupling ..................... 182 output impedance ...................... 180 phase ............................................ 179

EN61010 measurement category ...................7 pollution degree ..............................9

Environment safety instructions .......................... 9

Equipment category .................. 10

Ethernet interface ..................... 234

Firmware ................................... 169

Frequency coupling ................. 182

Front panel diagram .................. 15

Function keys key overview ................................ 16

Fuse replacement ..................... 406 safety instruction ............................ 8

GPIB remote control interface ............ 233

Ground symbol ............................................. 6

Help menu .................................. 29 interface ..................................... 231

LAN interface ........................... 234

Language selection .................. 170

List of features ............................ 12

Menu Tree ................................... 51

Modulation ................................. 90

AM ................................................. 92

Burst............................................. 147

FM ................................................ 101

PM ................................................ 116

PWM ............................................ 129

SUM ............................................. 122

Multi-unit sync connection ................................... 187 setup ............................................ 189

Operation

Amplitude ..................................... 88

Channel selection ......................... 71

DC Wave ....................................... 85

Frequency...................................... 86

Harmonic Characteristics ............ 84

Harmonic Order ........................... 82

Harmonic Wave ........................... 81

423

Noise Wave ................................... 81

Offset ............................................. 89

Pulse duty ............................... 78, 79

Pulse rise & fall time .............. 76, 77

Pulse width ................................... 75

Ramp ........................................ 79, 80

Sine ................................................. 72

Square ............................................ 73

Triangle ......................................... 74

Operation keys key overview ................................ 16

Operation menu......................... 70

Output indicators ...................... 17

Output terminals ....................... 18

Phase settings ........................... 179

Power on/off safety instruction ...................... 8, 10

Power up .................................... 25

Quick reference .......................... 26

Rear panel diagram ................... 20

Reference clock ........................ 173 remote control interface configuration ...... 231, 238

Remote interface ...................... 230

Error messages ........................... 387 functionality check ..................... 236

GPIB ............................................. 164

AFG-3021/3022/3031/3032 User Manual

LAN ............................................. 165

LAN host name .......................... 167

SCPI registers ............................. 400 screen lock .................................. 237

Syntax .......................................... 241 terminal connection ................... 236

USB .............................................. 168

Screen lock ................................ 237

Secondary System Settings ..... 159

Remote interface ........................ 164

System and Settings ................... 169

Service operation about disassembly ......................... 7

Set output impedance ..... 175, 180

Setting up the instrument ......... 24

Software .................................... 169

Specifications ............................ 407

Syncing multiple units ............ 187

Tracking .................................... 185

UK power cord ........................... 11

Updating Software and firmware

............................................... 169

USB remote control interface ............ 231

Warning symbol .......................... 6

424